Home
        Manual - Vision Solutions de procédés
         Contents
1.                      109   CO N  1 UO HO         1  LO  tO  tO FLO tO  CN  CI CN                       e  Ke    we                                               x          e co  co m c co           Kei                                                                                                  b  p  Beioloilo                     SESE SS                                                                                      Lr                           l                          E              co      2       LO co   D O  o gt           gt   LO Fx       eo  HINN e        co    13  3       68  8                      NINN       Kei     o   M    96 49  96 49    68  68    e  tO    e  e       oO  wo  ele    cm    320   360   56    80    NJ 30P U  iN                 Gerat    Tabelle 1  Einsatz als Kategorie 1    Seite 3 7          r  fbescheinigung darf nur unver  ndert weiterverbreitet werden     Ausz  ge oder   nderungen bed  rfen der Genehmigung der Physikalisch Technischen Bundesanstalt     P    EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigungen ohne Unterschrift und ohne Siegel haben keine G  ltigkeit   Diese EG Baumuster     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt e Bundesallee 100     D 38116 Braunschweig       Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt    Braunschweig und Berlin  5  Erg  nzung zur EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X        H  chstzul  ssige Umgebungstemperatur in   C bei Einsatz in Temperaturklasse    Typen Ci     LEBEN T4 T1 T4 T1 74 11          T5   T4 T1    FJ 6 11
2.                   NJ 2 5 F N    IC      NJ 2 F1 N    IC    NJ 2 V3 N    IIC    NJ 3 V3 N    IIC            Sheet 5 6       EC type examination Certificates without signature and official stamp shall not be valid  The certificates may be circulated  only without alteration  Extracts or alterations are subject to approval by the Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt   In case of dispute  the German text shall prevail     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt     Bundesallee 100   38116 Braunschweig  Germany    Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt    Braunschweig und Berlin  4  SUPPLEMENT TO EC TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X       NJ AEN   NJ 6 F N             NJ 10 F N     NJ 15 U  N                   NJ 15 M1  N              NJ 20 U  N             NJ 30P U  1N     NJ 40     N                             5   nadmissible electrostatic charge of parts of the metal housing has to be avoided for the following  types of cuboidal inductive sensors  Dangerous electrostatic charge of parts of the metal housing  can be avoided by grounding of these parts whereas very small parts of the metal housing  e g     screws  do not need to be grounded     FJ 6 110 N      FJ 7 N     NCB15 U3 N0     NCB15 U4 N0     NCB20 L2 NO     NCB40 FP NO P3     NCB40 FP NO P4     NCN20 U3 N0     NCN20 U4 N0     NCN30 U3 N0       NCN30 U4 N0     NCNA0 L2 NO     NCN40 U3 N0     NCN40 U4 N0     NCN50 FP NO P3     NCN50 FP NO P4     NJ 15 U3 4N      NJ 15 U44N      NJ 15 M1 N V   NJ 20 U34N     
3.              September 2012 2 1       Installation SD760       2 1 SHIPPING AND STORAGE    Carefully unpack the positioner  Save the shipping materials in case reshipment is needed     If the positioner is to be temporarily stocked  stored for an extended period  or shipped to another location prior to  piping  the factory installed plastic plugs must remain inserted in all otherwise un piped pneumatic ports and  conduit connectors to prevent entry of moisture  dirt  or other contaminants     2 2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS   Siemens mounting bracket kits  feedback kits  and cam kits are listed in Section 1 3 Optional Kits  Installer supplied  materials include the following  This list will vary with installation site and involved process equipment    e Pipe  appropriate fittings  and non hardening pipe sealant    e Instrument quality  pressure regulated air    e If installing in a hazardous area  refer to Siemens control drawing 15032 7602 at the end of Section 2 5 for  electrical installation wiring  barriers  and entity data for barrier selection    e   Electrical conduit and fittings    e  Anti static service kit     A kit containing a conductive mat and wrist strap is available from most electronic  supply companies  When handling a circuit board  always use the kit to protect semiconductor components  from electrostatic discharge     2 3 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION    This section is divided by actuator valve action     Section 2 3 1 is for linear applications and Section 2 3 2 
4.             id    as  i  w4i   Shipping Plug                               49 asas             50  16300233   Speed Adjusters 9716300 323 Enclosure   See Notes                2    16300 79  16300 404  Note 3  Note 3    WIRILBRITR MTR le                                                    jojojo                   nin    Note 3 Screw Standoff  Long  used in Optional Output Kit   Note 3 Screw Standoff  Short  used in Optional Output Kit                   Note 3 Output Option Kit  includes standoffs and other parts as appropriate     532   Note 3 Limit Switch Actuator Cams    883   Note 3 Beacon Indicator Kit  includes lens  gasket and other parts                 N    ale     9  5o    n           Note 3 Flat Indicator Lens  16377 87 Beacon Retaining Plate    ee Note 3 Flat Indicator Kit  includes lens  gasket and other parts   ee Note 3  16300 86      Beacon Upper Label    1 1924 Screw  8 32 x 1 2 Lg   Flat Head  12444 2 Gauge  0 160 psig  5 820 Beacon Lower Label      64   9105 8 Clamp  760E      65  14820 Screw  760E   8 32 x 1 4 Lg   Binding Head    66      144187    See Note 3 Retaining Ring  Beacon Indicator Kit  16300 203 NEMA 4X Vent  Std    71      16300 62 Cam  Equal Percentage  Rectilinear Input Shaft    16300 61 Cam  Quick Opening  Rectilinear Input Shaft  16300 64 Cam  Quick Opening  Rotary Input Shaft      z  14865 Screw  8 32 x 3 8 Lg   Binding Head    2 Screw  8 32 x 1 4 Lg   Fillister Head  16300 65 Cam  Equal Percentage  Rotary Input Shaft    12444 1 Gauge  0 30 p
5.            EE EE    Characterristic  direct or reverse acting  0 4    20 mA or 20  0 4  mA Note  Location is allowed in Class Il           Division 1  Group E  F  G  for models 22 06 66    22 06 67  22 06 68  22 06 69 only    An approved seal must be used at the enclosure conduit  opening to maintain Intrinsic Safe circuit integrity          Hazardous Area    Class    Division 1  Groups A  B  C  D          BARRIER PARAMETERS    No revision can be made without CSA notification E  max  voltage  Vmax min  resistance  Rmin    3 2     0 0           Nach DAN Ene Allgemelntoleranzen EE      GC      5  S 30 330      4 Vd PEE       201   02              203   Eu See  z  ce 29 5 305               tertie nad TENA            S     28 210 nach DIN ISO 1302 3 i oan       2 EI cest      EE a  gt                3 Benennung  Tx  t 12 40                     2305   Thieme  C tion Di  en  a LL  ese pou  onnection Diagram kr       u a     l P Converter 22 06 XX    rechtliche Benutzun  Dritte hat zivil  un    a 1  ABB 900842  CSA     1    2      3     as    Translation    EC TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE    Equipment or Protective System intended for use in potentially explosive  atmospheres   Directive 94 9 EC    EC Type Examination Certificate Number  TUV 99 ATEX 1487 X     4  Equipment or UD transformer type Doc 901068        901069  Protective System     5  Manufacturer  Hartmann  amp  Braun GmbH  amp  Co  KG   Geschaftsbereich Geratetechnik    6  Address  D 30179 Hannover  Hackethalstr  7    7
6.           GO   CO   NININININININININININININININININININININININININ  ejoriepjoiojiolerieoolico                                                                                                                                                       e                                    gg 9 gy gp bere  SYP                7          q 177710707009      slololF  S    e  2  1iil    l21  14 IE    z  le  II elis  1     Kl REISE e EA BEER EIS EIS                     am    dis ESSE         sr Po         aba c       maiz 212 212       lt    lt   O O O O O             gt                         l    oO      150   110   73   88   100  73   88   100   62   77   81   54   63   63       e5  220  73 88  100     NO  N     V3 NO   V3 NO  F       110 N  N  NJ 2 F1 N  NJ 2 V3 N  NJ 4 F N  NJ 6 F N  NJ 10 F N  NJ 15 U  N  NJ 15 M1  N  NJ 20 U  N  NJ 30 U  N  NJ 30P U  1N  NJ 40     N  NJ 50 FP N    z     z      2    FJ 6  FJ7         16  Pr  fbericht PTB Ex 00 29269    Seite 3 4    Diese EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung darf nur unverandert weiterverbreitet werden   Ausz  ge oder Anderungen bed  rfen der Genehmigung der Physikalisch Technischen Bundesanstalt     EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigungen ohne Unterschrift und ohne Siegel haben keine G  ltigkeit     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt     Bundesallee 100     D 38116 Braunschweig    Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt PIB    Braunschweig und Berlin  Anlage zur EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X     17  Besondere Bedingungen  
7.          03 22406    eee die Explosionsschutz  Im Auftrag   7     wc  Dr  Ing  U  Johann  Regierungsdirekto         Braunschweig  04  April 2003    Seite 3 3    EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigungen ohne Unterschrift und ohne Siegel haben keine G  ltigkeit   Diese EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung darf nur unver  ndert weiterverbreitet werden   Ausz  ge oder   nderungen bed  rfen der Genehmigung der Physikalisch Technischen Bundesanstalt     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt    Bundesallee 100     D 38116 Braunschweig    Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt DB    Braunschweig und Berlin    3  ERGANZUNG  gem     Richtlinie 94 9 EG Anhang III Ziffer 6    zur EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X    Gerat  Quaderf  rmige induktive Sensoren Typen FJ     NJ    und NC     Kennzeichnung     9 II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6  Hersteller  Pepper    Fuchs GmbH  Anschrift  K  nigsberger Allee 87    68307 Mannheim  Deutschland    Beschreibung der Erg  nzungen und Anderungen       Die EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung wird um den quaderf  rmigen induktiven Sensor         NJ 3 V3 N    erweitert  Der quaderf  rmige induktive Sensor Typ NJ 3 V3 N    ist ausschlie  lich f  r  den Betrieb in explosionsgef  hrdeten Bereichen vorgesehen  die den Einsatz von Kategorie 2   Ger  ten erfordern       Die weiteren Anderungen betreffen die Art der Kennzeichnung  den inneren Aufbau sowie die  Betriebsanleitung der quaderf  rmigen induktiven Sensoren  Die  Elektrischen Daten   die   Besonderen Bedingungen  so
8.          One Piece Input Shaft with    NAMUR or Square Adapter      Design Levels A and B ee        MH00560a    Shafts are shown without  sealing O rings     Universal Input Shaft Vu enne    with Separate NAMUR z                or Square Adapter      Design Level D       Figure 2 13 Feedback Components  Rotary Applications  Design Levels A  B  and D    Mechanical Installation   1  Determine cam characteristic  linear  equal percentage or quick opening  and direction of rotation of cam and  input shaft  CW or CCW  with increasing input signal  This information will be needed to change the cam  if  necessary  and then to index the cam     2  Fasten the mounting bracket to the valve positioner  Mounting bracket shape will vary with the design of the  actuator     3  Ifthe end of the positioner input shaft is D shaped  round with a flat on one side   perform step 4  If the end of  the positioner input shaft is a NAMUR style or 0 5  square shape  go to step 5     4  Installa NAMUR style adapter  0 5  square adapter  or other adapter  see Figures 2 3  2 13 and 2 14   Fasten  the adapter to the positioner input shaft  If desired  apply a thread locking solution to the setscrew  Tighten the  adapter setscrew on the flat of the input shaft to prevent adapter slippage    5  Mount the positioner bracket assembly on the actuator and connect the mechanical feedback components  Refer  to the Kit Installation Instructions included with the Siemens bracket kit and the feedback kit to install
9.         169 mW IP    242 mW    The assignment of the type of the connected circuit to the maximum permissible ambient  temperature and the temperature class as well as the effective internal reactances for the  individual types of cuboidal inductive sensors is shown in the following table                 sheet 2 4       EC type examination Certificates without signature and official stamp shall not be valid  The certificates may be circulated  only without alteration  Extracts or alterations are subject to approval by the Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt   In case of dispute  the German text shall prevail     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt    Bundesallee 100   D 38116 Braunschweig       PIB    Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt    Braunschweig und Berlin    SCHEDULE TO EC TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X       temperature class    T     T5  T4    T6 T6   T5  T4    T6   T5   T4   D T1 T1   1    maximum permissible ambient temperature in      for application                  tS Stitt si Bad Ded Dd ttt tt    NE    yt                                              LO  LO   LO  LO   LO  LO LO LO tO   LD  N  LO  WO   LO  M   tO   LO   LO   LO   LO   LO   LO   LO              ee                                                                                                3          3  6   E                          6d  5              c            NIN  LD  t   WO   2   LO   LD   LO   LOO LD   LO  LO   2   tO                     WII                 ist  t 
10.         NCN2 F56 N1     NBN3 F69 NO     NBNA4 V3 NO     NBNA4 V3 NO   Y189289   100   100   73  110   160   73    NCN15 M    NO   100   100   73  NCB20 L2 NO    110   200   73  NCN30 U    NO     NCB40 FP NO    NCNA4O  U     NO     NCNA40 L2 NO     NCN50 FP NO      NJ 0 8 F N     1 5 F N     2 5 F N     2 F1 N     2 V3 N     3 V3 N      4 F N     6 F N   NJ 10 F N      NJ 15 0          NJ 15 M1  N      NJ 20 U  N      NJ 30 0          NJ 30P U  1N      NJ 40             NJ 50 FP N      Tabelle 2  Einsatz als Kategorie 2 Ger  t                                                                                                                                           Seite 4 6       EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigungen ohne Unterschrift und ohne Siegel haben keine G  ltigkeit   Diese EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung darf nur unver  ndert weiterverbreitet werden   Ausz  ge oder Anderungen bed  rfen der Genehmigung der Physikalisch Technischen Bundesanstalt     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt    Bundesallee 100   D 38116 Braunschweig    Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt    Braunschweig und Berlin    4  Erganzung zur EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X    Besondere Bedingungen    1     Beim Einsatz der quaderf  rmigen induktiven Sensoren Typen FJ     NJ     NB          und NC    im    Temperaturbereich von  60   C bis  20   C sind diese durch Einbau in ein zus  tzliches Geh  use  vor Schlageinwirkung zu sch  tzen     Die Anschlussteile der quaderf  rmigen induktiven 
11.        140   130   56   68   96   49   61   89   28   40   68   13   25   53     NJ 20 U 4N      150   130   56   68   96   49   61   89   28   40   68   13   25   53    NJ 30 U  N    160   130   56   68   96   49   61   89   28   40   68   13   25   53    NJ 40           180   130   56   68   96   49     320   360 68   96   49   61   89   28   40   68   13   25   53         Sheet 2 3    EC type examination Certificates without signature and official stamp shall not be valid  The certificates may be circulated  only without alteration  Extracts or alterations are subject to approval by the Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt   In case of dispute  the German text shall prevail     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt     Bundesallee 100     38116 Braunschweig  Germany    Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt PIB    Braunschweig und Berlin    2  SUPPLEMENT TO EC TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X    Test report              03 22406    eene Explosionsschutz Braunschweig  April 04  2003  PY a    Rn            fet die    Df  Ing  U  Johannsniyet  Regierungsdirektor X7      Sheet 3 3    EC type examination Certificates without signature and official stamp shall not be valid  The certificates may be circulated  only without alteration  Extracts or alterations are subject to approval by the Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt   In case of dispute  the German text shall prevail     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt    Bundesallee 100   38116 Braunschweig  German
12.        71   86   100    N A   N A         tb IEEE        ann N A    100   100   74   89   100   69   84   100   51   66   91  N A NA  N A   100   100   73   88   100   63   83   100   48   63   82  N A N A   N A     ee erm je          100   150   74   89   100   69   84   100   51   66   87  N A N A  N A   100   100   77   92   100   75   90   100   67   82   90  N A N A   N A   100  100   77   92   100   75   90   100   67   82   90  NA NA  N A   100   100   63   78   100   63   78   100   63   78   90  N A N A  N A   100   100   75   90   100   71   86   100   57   72   87  N A N A   N A  N A  1100   100   73   88   100   66   81   100   45   60   s9   30   45     100  100   73   88   100   66   81   100   4s   60   s9   30   45     110   160   73   88   100   66   81   100   as   60   s9   30   45    1110   160   73   88   100   66   81   100   as   60   89   30   45    1120   130   73   88   100   66   81   100   4s   60   s9   30   45     220   360   73   88   100   66   s     100   45   60   89   30   45                     Dieses Dokument enth  lt sicherheitsrelevante Angaben  Es darf nicht ohne Absprache mit dem Normenfachmann ge  ndert werden        This document contains safety relevant information  It must not be altered without the authorization of the norm expert                                Confidential according to ISO 16016 Only valid as long as released in EDM or with a valid production documentation  Scale  1 1 date  2010 jun 03  Control Drawing h ti respo
13.        LI  OF       IN FHG  ry 7             768 3 4 NPT OR  2019 51       25 en   A LI   CONDUIT CONNECTION 424   50  12 7   10 77      4 950  gt  SQUARE ADAPTER   125 73   7 482   590 ra  gt       gt  114 99   190 04    lt i    2 00 4 00 6 00 2                 2532 Dimensions are inches  MM      6431      A         Sue 3  M6 X 1 D      h  3 772 4 HOLE    WH   95 81  31 DP     l D     Q  ei ei J Y Ye    2    GE  Mio 1 D9             b S      ELAT ON Ten    Bed     j INPUT SHAFT  21 968 NL dA      50 00       gen D SC   BOLT CIRCLE          jM                            ADAPTER SHAFT OPTIONS    Figure 2 2 Installation Dimensions and Adapter Shaft Options  Design Level D       2 4    September 2012    SD760 Installation                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   FLAT ON SIDE OF ADAPTER FEEDBACK LEVER  ARM  LENGTHS   2   4   amp  6   ENGAGES SIDE OF SQUARE LEVER ORIENTATION TEXT SHOWN  HOLE IN LEVER  52197      CCW FACE 760  CW AWAY   Y   330     ENDE    ROTARYACTUATOR     Ke  RETAINING  L____ ADAPTERS         NUT  amp  LOCKWASHER CLIP  HOLD LEVER  ARM   ONTO ADAPTER   500 SQUAR
14.        be     N  eo         N  E  70   en  I      uv          53                                         LD  OD   LO  tO   LO       CH                                       53                                                      Bettel         CN          NEN          5  25 53  53          25  2       e                         tO                   LO  LO  LO  LO  10  LO             FL             N                N  NIN CN  CN                                                     ob pee op    DEDE  37   49 63   49   25   25          81           t0             coo  r    rico   xr                       CO  CO  CO             CO              GO  CO                                      CO  00  00  00  00   00                               ON                  GN                                           NEI Cl                                  CL               NL                  T          v   vii v ele ele bad Dad Daud bani Dad    Doni bani Dyui Dand Dand Dand Daud Dand Dand Daud Daui II Day                 CO  CO             O  ojoj ojojo                       CO  CO  CO                                                    Gd           GD     GD  Or         GD  0910       GP  D   G   Gd   D   G2   G   Gd           Ted Tred wg eg ed ee      TI n  SE                             SE  ST   SE  SE  SE   SE   SE   SE   SE      SF   89    ssige Umgebungstemperatur in  C bei Einsatz in Temperaturklasse     T    a         chstzul    E wv   loioio col r uwlxvoluo olcdvl   voicdvi do  dov  dv 
15.       3 0 CAM INDEXING AND POSITIONER CALIBRATION    This section describes indexing the installed cam and calibrating the positioner  Changing the cam to one with a  different characteristic is also described  Calibrate a positioner after changing or indexing the cam  after installing  an Option Kit that affects calibration  e g  Input Shaft Kit or Flow Output  Spool  Kit   and after repair        A WARNING          Electrical shock hazard  a  Explosion hazard WZ  Can cause death or injury  WZ   e Remove power from all wires and terminals before working on      equipment     e In potentially hazardous atmosphere  remove power from equipment  before connecting or disconnecting power  signal  or other circuit     e Observe all pertinent regulations regarding installation in hazardous                area   A CAUTION    Pinch hazard             wr    Remove supply pressure before working on this equipment        3 1 EQUIPMENT NEEDED    e Pressure regulator  adjustable from 0 to 30 psig  760P only  e   Test gauge  0 to 30 psig   e Small slotted screwdriver   e Current source  4 20 mA  760E only   e Ammeter  4 20 mA  760E only    e Common hand tools    3 2 CAM INSTALLATION AND INDEXING    The positioner is cam characterized and is shipped with a linear cam installed  unless otherwise specified on the  order  This section describes installing another cam type  as necessary  and selecting the cam lobe  CW or CCW    Figure 3 1 shows the cam and related parts     Also discussed in thi
16.       Siemens Industry  Inc  INSTALLATION AND SERVICE INSTRUCTION             SD760  Issue  8  September 2012    MH00550b       EI  N  8  e      I          ValvePAC Series 760  Pneumatic and Electro Pneumatic    Valve Positioners    SD760 Contents       TABLE OF CONTENTS    SECTION PAGE                                                                                 n iii  E OINTRO DUCTION E 1 1  TT SPECIFICATIONS s tetro ek eta reu      ee e EHE ue ee Peel ex ee ce OPERE Peu      estt 1 1  1 2 MODEL DESIGNATION    necesite tette ee eee e men cutsecunsutbucctcuneetensuadeccndetensuadecsbecss 1 4  1 2 1 Design  Levels    iet vede ee e e Re i e Ee teed E RE UI Re REI ede dn 1 4  LS OPTIONAL KETS  tee ERE P RR BOR ENERO UE BREUI 1 6  L 44CUSTOMEBR PRODUCT SUPPORT    ee sauna             ENEE 1 9  2 0 INSTALEATION ES cr 2 1  2  1 SHIPPINGANB  STORAGE                d Ree eae RU EH Rr Drame bee en 2 2  22 INSTALLATION MATERIALS  eere ctr tti Have vereor ee ee e EE er ee ee na e eed 2 2  2 33 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION  uses essen gesessen PR eee Pee ge ages eds 2 2  2 3   Linear Actuator Applications    eere tede ede    doe dedere de eee edere n 2 6  2 3 2 Rotary Actuator Applteattons  eene nnne nnne                            2 10  2 4x PNEUMATIG                       cere Ee Bun ann eee Ra S 2  4  KE PIPS usce eid aee D E a dae tet I RN RR I EN d ne 2 15  2 42  Instrument Air Requirements             ee RR Ad e eR eti 2 16  2 5 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS          nenn nennen re e XR bun
17.      0 20 40 60 80 100    Input Signal  Direct Acting  Scale Reversed if Reverse Acting     Figure 3 3 Standard Cam Characteristics    3 2 2 Cam Indexing    Refer to Figures 3 1  3 4  and 3 5 and the exploded view drawing in the Parts List section for cam and associated  hardware identification     1  Seat the actuator in the position corresponding to zero percent input signal     2  Remove supply air pressure from the positioner and actuator     A CAUTION    Do not apply supply air pressure to the actuator or the valve positioner during the  indexing process  Applying pressure could cause unexpected movement that could  lead to personal injury or equipment damage     3  Remove electrical power from the positioner  Remove the 4 20 mA input signal from a Model 760E positioner   4  Remove the positioner cover by loosening four straight slot screws   5  If installed  remove the following    1  Beacon or flat indicator  see Figure 4 9 or 4 10   2  PC board based feedback or limit switch option  see Figure 4 1   3  Extension shaft and compression washer  see Figure 4 2    6  Loosen the cam locking screw in the cam locking nut and loosen the cam locking nut 2 3 turns  see Figure 3 4     To replace the installed cam  perform the following four steps  Otherwise  go to Step 7   1  Remove the cam locking nut  upper cam index  lower cam index  and the installed cam   2  Install the needed cam with the cam type  e g  90LIN  and lobe text  e g  CCW  visible     3  Install the lower cam in
18.      81   100   45  60   89    220   360   73  88   100  66   81   100  45 60  89    NJ 0 8 F N    100 100  45 60  78    NJ 1 5 F N    50   73  88 67   82 45 60  78  3                   NJ 2 5 F N     NJ 2 F1 N     NJ 2 V3 N     NJ 3 V3 N     NJ 4 F N      6 F N                            NJ 15 0         NJ 15 M1  N     NJ 20 0         NJ 30 U  N     NJ 30P U  1N     NJ 40     N                               Table 2  Application as category 2 equipment    Sheet 4 7    I e CL  EC type examination Certificates without signature and official stamp shall not be valid  The certificates may be circulated  only without alteration  Extracts or alterations are subject to approval by the Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt   In case of dispute  the German text shall prevail     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt e Bundesallee 100     38116 Braunschweig   GERMANY    Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt    Braunschweig und Berlin       5  SUPPLEMENT TO EC TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X    Special conditions for safe use    1  For the application within a temperature range of  60   C to  20   C the cuboidal inductive sensors   types FJ     NJ     NB    and NC    must be protected against damage due to impact by mounting    into an additional housing     2  The connection facilities of the cuboidal inductive sensors  types FJ     NJ     NB    and NC    shall  be installed as such that a minimum degree of protection of IP20 in accordance with IEC     publication 60529
19.      Translation     Equipment and Protective Systems intended for Use in  Potentially Explosive Atmospheres   Directive 94 9 EC    EC type examination Certificate Number     PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X  Equipment  Cuboidal inductive sensors  types FJ     NJ    and NC     Manufacturer  Pepperl   Fuchs GmbH  Address  D 68307 Mannheim    This equipment and any acceptable variation thereto are specified in the schedule to this certificate and  the documents therein referred to     The Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt  notified body No  0102 in accordance with Article 9 of the  Council Directive 94 9 EC of 23 March 1994  certifies that this equipment has been found to comply with  the Essential Health and Safety Requirements relating to the design and construction of equipment and  protective systems intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres  given in Annex ll to the  Directive     The examination and test results are recorded in the confidential report PTB Ex 00 29269     Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements has been assured by compliance with   EN 50014 1997 EN 50020 1994    If the sign  X  is placed after the certificate number  it indicates that the equipment is subject to special  conditions for safe use specified in the schedule to this certificate     This EC type examination Certificate relates only to the design and construction of the specified  equipment in accordance with Directive 94 9 EC  Further requirements of this Directive apply t
20.     Figure 4 11 I P Installation  Exploded View       September 2012 4 11    Option Kit Installation SD760       5     Place two O rings from the kit in the recesses in the manifold block and place the manifold block in the  positioner enclosure so the transducer mounting screw holes align     Insert the 10 32 x 2 1 4 inch screw from the kit into the I P Transducer from the kit  Place the I P Transducer  over the manifold block and guide the screw through the manifold block  Thread the screw into the enclosure   Align the I P and manifold block and tighten the screw securely     Install the wire clamp from the kit as shown in Figure 4 11     Refer to Siemens control drawing 15032 7602 and attach the input leads  recommend 22 AWG shielded   twisted pair wire minimum  to the   and   connections of the I P Transducer terminal strip  The wire should  enter the positioner through the conduit connection and be routed through the wire clamp  See Section 2 5 for  general and hazardous location wiring requirements     Verify I P operation and calibration by performing the procedure in Section 3 3 Calibration     IMPORTANT    Calibrate the positioner by adjusting only the zero and span screws shown in Figure 3   7  Do not adjust the factory set I P calibration screws shown in Figure 4 11     10  Install positioner cover and tighten screws to 20 Ib  in   2 3 N m      4 5 OUTPUT CAPACITY SPOOL KITS    The following steps must be carried out with clean hands and tools and in a clean area 
21.     Indicator   relay  etc          TB2 1  Lower Switch  NC ak      TB2 5  Upper Switch   TB2 2  Lower Switch     1  1              H  V    1  1  D  D  D  i    Barrier must be CSA Certified and FM Approved dual channel shunt diode Zener Barrier with  output safety parameters  as follows     Voc Channel 1   earth     28V     Isc Channel 1   lt  0 093A  Voc Channel 2   earth  lt  28V     Isc Channel 2  Diode Return   CSA Certified and FM Approved MTL787 dual channel Barrier is recommended     Limit Switch Cable Parameters for Intrinsic Safety   Ungrounded Circuit Single Barrier     A   Cable Capacitance may not exceed Ca of the barrier     B   Cable Inductance may not exceed La of the barrier or the cable L R ratio may not exceed  the L R ratio of the barrier     Ambient Temperature Range  See Sheet 2 of 13     Normally  TB2 1 and TB2 4 are connected to Barrier channel 2 as shown  Alternativly  TB2 2    may be connected to Barrier channel 2 if no connection is made to TB2 1 and or TB2 5 may be  connected to Barrier channel 2 if no connection is made to TB2 4     Details Approved Title    19 Feb  98 As FM Approved J  Sweeney Control Drawing for  20 April 98 J  Sweeney    14 June 07   ControlAir I P Added   J  Sweeney Series 760 Valve Controller  19 May 08   Minor correction pg 13   J  Sweeney  22 June 11 Correct pg 12  add SII J  Sweeney      D ing No   Siemens Industry  Inc  lie    Spring House PA  USA 19477 15032 7602 Sheet 9 of 13       Limit Switch Intrinsically Safe and Div
22.     Instrument Application Notes    PRAEDED    Ex Grenzwerte f  r TEIP11 und TZIM  Ex limit values for TEIP11 and TZIM                               li U       50 mA 42 5 V 2 125 W  60 mA 38 8 V 2 328 W  100 mA 30 V 3 0 W  120 mA 28 V 3 36 W  150 mA 25 5 V 3 825 W       Innere Induktivitat und Kapazitat vernachlassigbar   The effective internal inductance and capacitance is negligibly small     Die Werte wurden ermittelt aus   The values are determined from     Ex Zertifikat TUV 99 ATEX 1487 X  Ex certification TUV 99 ATEX 1487 X    EN 50020 Teil 7  Anhang A  Tabelle A 1  EN 50020 part 7  annex A  table A 1    Zul  ssiger Kurzschlussstrom entsprechend der Spannung und der Ger  tegruppe  f  r  Betriebsmittel der Gruppe IIC mit einem Sicherheitsfaktor von 1 5     Permissible short circuit current according to the voltage and device group for devices of  group IIC with a safety factor of 1 5        ABB Automation Products GmbH  Schillerstr  72  D 32425 Minden  Tel   49 571 830 0  Fax  49 571 830 1860    I P Umformer Converter  TEIP 11  Doc  901068 Ri 260Q  Schutzart Protection           2G EExialICT6 CE i  T  V 99 ATEX 1487 X  li u  Tu siehe Zertifikat 0032    A DI  ABB Automation JADE         32425 Minden  Made in Germany    l P UnmtermemuConvemer    TEIP 11  Doc  901069 Ri 260Q          2G EExiallC T6    TUV 99 ATEX 1487 X CE    li u  Tu siehe Zertifikat 0032    ABB Automation AL EP ED  D SIS Minden  Made in Germany PA Ip ap       SD760 Cam Indexing and Positioner Calibration 
23.     Technische Oberfl  che L  ngenmafle  Winkelma  e      nach DIN ISO 1302    Voltage rating of Zener diodes   7 5 V  Power rating of Zener diodes   5 W    Tag  Gezelchnet   07 07  iLa  epr  ft 2 53 po        ov        No revision can be made without FM notification  Characteristic  reverse acting  EN        Res    j   NEN   __   ea       BER         Rev  1  20 03 00     Ma  stab  Benennung   ES Connection Diagram  l P Converter 22 06 a    BB Materlal Nr  9 0 0 8 n 2 F M Blatt o h       0      a   2   gt    2         5  en      5   B5       Ed       Ek   gt      5    gt   4     3        a                2          gt             2  o  gu      SS  Et   z  55  ug  E Ee  Ss  Jo  ue   22  e    E  SS  23  Lm  eI           u    m    2  EN     zz  SS  es    Das Urhebercecht an dieser Zeichnung                 ABB Automation    n    id    t    ABB Automa  VIE      EE EE EE    g  gung und wider     Empf  nger od     g durch  und strafrechtliche Folgen      n    ie TEEN EEE          EE EEE EE            8                    ABB Automation Products T  Control Document No  900842  CSA Approved for I P Converter Type 22 06 XX  Hazardous   rea   Nonhazardous Area  Class 1  Division 1  Groups C  D    RO       E    l I       i VP circuit resistance intrinsically safe circuit      Ri 260 ohms   10  Vmax  Rmin  see table below    1    at 20  C  TCR  0 4  1K         1      C     1  Ge    Ge Ee et    CSA Approved    Safety barrier  i  Rcs Note  Location is allowed in Class Il  II   Characterris
24.     Wiring methods must be in accordance with the National Electrical Code  ANSI NFPA 70  Article 501 4 b  for Class    Division 2   502 4 a  for Class Il  Division 1  502 4 b  for Class Il  Division 2  503 3 a  for Class Ill  Division 1  503 3 b  for Class Ill  Division 2   Zone 2 wiring requirements are equivalent to Division 2 wiring requirements  See manufacturer s instructions for connection of  devices and electrical data     These proximity sensors are rated  Nonincendive   Proximity sensors without a provision for conduit connection  i e  via a conduit  adapter  or a sensor with a plastic base must be mounted in a tool secured enclosure meeting the requirements of ANSI ISA S82   Alternatively  sensors in accordance with Table 1 may be wired according to nonincendive field wire methods  a conduit connection  or enclosure is not needed            Proximity sensors  conduit  enclosures  and exposed noncurrent carrying metal parts must be grounded and bonded in accordance  with the National Electrical Code  ANSI NFPA 70  Article 250     WARNING   DO NOT CONNECT OR DISCONNECT WHILE CIRCUIT IS LIVE UNLESS LOCATION IS KNOWN TO BE NONHAZARDOUS   The relay outputs of a proximity sensor must be supplied by a nonincendive source   Sensitivity adjustment should only be done when the area is known to be nonhazardous     A temperature rating of T5 applies for all nonincendive proximity sensors  SEE TABLE 2 for exceptions    GC Got       The nonincendive field wiring concept allows 
25.    Elektrischen Daten    sowie den Ger  tekategorien herstellen  f  r alle Typen der quaderf  rmigen  induktiven Sensoren nachfolgend dargestellt     Des Weiteren werden die geanderten  Besonderen Bedingungen  dargestellt     Elektrische Daten    Auswerte  und  Versorgungsstromkreis                        in Z  ndschutzart Eigensicherheit EEx ia IIC IIB IA  bzw  EEx ib lIC IIB IIA    nur zum Anschluss an bescheinigte eigensichere Stromkreise  H  chstwerte     Typ 1 Typ 2 Typ 3 Typ4  U   16V i   i       25 mA        34 mW P    64 mW       169 mW P    242 mW    Beim Einsatz als Kategorie 1 Ger  t ist zu beachten  dass der  Auswerte  und Versorgungsstromkreis der Z  ndschutzart  Eigensicherheit EEx ia IIC IIB entsprechen muss                  Die Zusammenh  nge zwischen dem Typ des angeschlossenen Stromkreises  der h  chstzul  ssigen  Umgebungstemperatur f  r den Einsatz als Kategorie 1  bzw  Kategorie 2 Ger  t und der  Temperaturklasse sowie den wirksamen inneren Reaktanzen f  r die einzelnen Typen der  quaderf  rmigen induktiven Sensoren sind den nachfolgenden Tabellen zu entnehmen     Seite 2 6       EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigungen ohne Unterschrift und ohne Siegel haben keine G  ltigkeit   Diese EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung darf nur unver  ndert weiterverbreitet werden   Ausz  ge oder Anderungen bed  rfen der Genehmigung der Physikalisch Technischen Bundesanstalt     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt     Bundesallee 100 e D 38116 Braunschweig       Physikalisch Techni
26.    H       kee       4 20 mA Feedback 1K Ohm Potentiometer Mechanical Limit Switch  Board Board and 4 20 mA Board    Figure 4 1 Output Option Boards       4 2 September 2012    SD760 Option Kit Installation       Circuit Board Handling    Electrostatic discharge can damage semiconductor devices  A properly grounded conductive wrist strap   4  must be worn whenever a circuit board assembly is handled or touched  An anti static service kit with a  wrist strap and static dissipative mat is available from most electronics supply companies     Store an uninstalled circuit board in a static shielding bag     Equipment Needed  e Common hand tools for installing and wiring printed circuit board assemblies  e Torque wrench  20 Ib  in   2 3 Nm      e Anti Static Service Kit  described above     4 1 1 Installation   These kits use a common circuit board with the electrical components on the board determined by the option s   residing on the board  The PC board is supported by three 8 32 x 1 4  screws and hex standoffs    Most of the following steps will be performed for all output option board kits  Where a step is performed only for a  particular board type  the board type is stated    1  Remove supply pressure from the positioner    2  Remove all electrical signals and power from the positioner     3  To protect sensitive semiconductor devices from electrostatic discharge  fasten a conductive wrist strap on your  wrist and connect the wrist strap ground lead to a good ground     4  Lo
27.    NCN30 U4 NO    NJ 20 04        FJ 7 N    NCN40 U3 N0    NJ 30 03        NCB15 U3 N0    NCN40 U4 N0    NJ 30 U4 N     NCB15 U4 N0    NCN50 FP NO P3    NJ 30P U3 1N     NCB40 FP NO P3    NCN50 FP NO P4    NJ 30P U4 1N     NCB40 FP NO P4    NJ 15 U3 N    NJ 40 U3 N     NCN20 U3 N0    NJ 15 04       NJ 40 04        NCN20 U4 N0    NJ 15 M1 N V NJ 50 FP N P3     NCN30 U3 NO    NJ 20 U3 N    NJ 50 FP N P4        18  Grundlegende Sicherheits  und Gesundheitsanforderungen  Durch vorgenannte Normen abgedeckt     Braunschweig  30  Juni 2000    D  E  Dr  Ing  U  Johannsmeyer   Y        Seite 4 4       EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigungen ohne Unterschrift und ohne Siegel haben keine G  ltigkeit   Diese EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung darf nur unver  ndert weiterverbreitet werden   Ausz  ge oder Anderungen bed  rfen der Genehmigung der Physikalisch Technischen Bundesanstalt     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt    Bundesallee 100   D 38116 Braunschweig    Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt PIB    Braunschweig und Berlin    1  ERG  NZUNG  gem     Richtlinie 94 9 EG Anhang Ill Ziffer 6    zur EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X    Gerat  Quaderf  rmige induktive Sensoren Typen FJ     NJ    und NC     Kennzeichnung     ll 2 G EEx ia      T6  Hersteller  Pepperl   Fuchs GmbH    Anschrift  68307 Mannheim  Deutschland    Beschreibung der Erg  nzungen und Anderungen    Die bestehende EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung f  r die quaderf  rmigen induktiven Sensoren der  Typen FJ     
28.    NCN50 FP NO P3    NJ 50 FP N P3     NCB15 U3 N0    NCN50 FP NO P4    NJ 50 FP N P4     NCB15 U4 N0    NJ 15 U3 4N    NJ 30 U4 4N     NCB20 L2 NO    NJ 15 04          Seite 6 7                      EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigungen ohne Unterschrift und ohne Siegel haben keine G  ltigkeit   Diese EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung darf nur unver  ndert weiterverbreitet werden   Ausz  ge oder   nderungen bed  rfen der Genehmigung der Physikalisch Technischen Bundesanstalt     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt e Bundesallee 100 e D 38116 Braunschweig       Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt    Braunschweig und Berlin  5  Erg  nzung zur EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X    Angewandte Normen  EN 60079 0 2006 EN 60079 11 2007 EN 60079 26 2007    Pr  fbericht        Ex 08 26271       dad Eso ktor Dekoren Braunschweig  26  November 2008  Im Auft   g     Mes              Seite 7 7    emm EH                      eg    EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigungen ohne Unterschrift und ohne Siegel haben keine G  ltigkeit   Diese EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung darf nur unver  ndert weiterverbreitet werden   Ausz  ge oder Anderungen bed  rfen der Genehmigung der Physikalisch  Technischen Bundesanstalt     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt     Bundesallee 100     D 38116 Braunschweig    Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt    PIB    Braunschweig und Berlin     1      2    3      4    5    6    7      8      9      10      11      12              EC TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE
29.    ou                 116 01 65F      150  1915  Twinsburg norm US GAP sheet 6 of 8                          NJ 15 30GM N     140  100   76   91   100   73   88   100   62   77   81   54   63   6         NJ 25 50 N          150  140   73   88   100   69   84   100   S1   66   so   39   54   61     NJ 20 40 N     140  140   73   88   100   69   84   100  51   66   so   39                 Table 10   INDUCTIVE RING SENSORS                 1        2        3        4  01  16   01   16 V 01   16   01  16    coe ae    ee    34 mW   64 mW   169 mW   242 mW  Model ren  RC10 a N3a              100      ae 1851 20   90               N A  RC10 a N0a  150   100   75   90   100   70   85   100   55   70   90               N A  RCI5 a N0 a   150   100   75   so   100   70   85   100   55   70   90  N A N A  NA  RCI5 a N3a   90   70   75   so   100   70   85   100   55   70   90                NA  RJ10 Na   30   20   75   90   100   70   85   100   55   70   90               NA  RJ10 a Na   30   20   75   so   100   70   85   100   55   70 90               NA  RJ10 Bia   90   20   75   so   100   70   85   100   55   70 90  NA NA  NA  RJ10 a Bia   90   20   75   90   100   70   85   100   55   70   90               N A  RJI5 Na 1130   20   75   so   100   70   85   100   55   70   90  N A N A  NA  RJ15 a Na   130   20   75   90   100   70   85   100   55   70   90               N A  RJIS Bia   90   so   75   so   100   70   85   100   55   70   90               NA  RJ15 a Bia   90   so   7
30.   1  Beim Einsatz der quaderf  rmigen induktiven Sensoren Typen FJ    NJ    und NC    im  Temperaturbereich von  60  C bis  20   C sind diese durch Einbau in ein zus  tzliches  Gehause vor Schlageinwirkung zu sch  tzen     2  Die Anschlu  teile der quaderf  rmigen induktiven Sensoren Typen FJ     NJ    und NC   sind  so zu errichten  da   mindestens die Schutzart IP20 gem     IEC Publikation 60529 1989  erreicht wird     3  Der Zusammenhang zwischen dem Typ des angeschlossenen Stromkreises  der h  chstzu   l  ssigen Umgebungstemperatur und der Temperaturklasse sowie den wirksamen inneren  Reaktanzen f  r die einzelnen Typen der quaderf  rmigen induktiven Sensoren ist der Tabelle  unter Punkt  15  dieser EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung zu entnehmen     4  Bei Einsatz in Gruppe IIC ist bei den folgenden Typen der quaderf  rmigen induktiven  Sensoren die unzul  ssige elektrostatische Aufladung der Kunststoffgeh  use zu vermeiden  und ein entsprechender Warnhinweis auf dem Ger  t anzubringen     NCB40 FP NO    NJ 30P U    1N     NCN40 U    NO    NJ 40 U    N           50              NJ 50 FP N       5  Bei den folgenden Typen der quaderf  rmigen induktiven Sensoren ist die unzul  ssige  elektrostatische Aufladung der Metallgeh  useteile zu vermeiden  Gef  hrliche  elektrostatische Aufladungen der Metallgehauseteile k  nnen durch Erdung dieser  Metallgeh  useteile vermieden werden  wobei sehr kleine Metallgeh  useteile  z B   Schrauben  nicht geerdet werden m  ssen     FJ 6 110 N 
31.   NCN40 L2 NoO     NCN50 FP NO     NJ 0 8 F N     NJ 1 5 F N     NJ 2 5 F N    NJ 2 F1 N     NJ 2 V3 N     NJ 3 V3 N     NJ AEN   NJ 6 F N   NJ 10 F N     NJ 15 U  N     NJ 15 M1  N                       60  45   60  55   70    41   56    45   60                                                                                                                                                                                                                66           150   130 88   100   66    NJ 30 U  N    160   130   73   88   100   66   81   100         NJ 30P U  1N       73   88   100   66   81   100  NJ 40     N    180   130   73   88   100  66   81   100   45  NJ 50 FP N    360   73   88   100   66   81    Tabelle 2  Application as category 2 equipment                                           Sheet 4 6       EC type examination Certificates without signature and official stamp shall not be valid  The certificates may be circulated  only without alteration  Extracts or alterations are subject to approval by the Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt   In case of dispute  the German text shall prevail     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt     Bundesallee 100   38116 Braunschweig  Germany       Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt    Braunschweig und Berlin  4  SUPPLEMENT TO EC TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X    Special conditions for safe use    1  For the application within a temperature range of  60   C to  20   C the cuboidal inductive sensors   types F
32.   NJ 20 U4 4N     NJ 30 03        NJ 30 U4 4N     NJ 30P U3 1N     NJ 30P U4 1N     NJ 40 U3 N     NJ 40 U4 4N     NJ 50 FP N P3     NJ 50 FP N P4       Test report  PTB Ex 06 25344    Braunschweig  April 20  2006       Direktor und Professor      Sheet 6 6       EC type examination Certificates without signature and official stamp shall not be valid  The certificates may be circulated  only without alteration  Extracts or alterations are subject to approval by the Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt   In case of dispute  the German text shall prevail     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt     Bundesallee 100     38116 Braunschweig  Germany    ZSEx10101e dot       Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt    Braunschweig und Berlin    5  SUPPLEMENT  according to Directive 94 9 EC Annex 111 6    to EC TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X     Translation     Equipment  Cuboidal inductive sensors  types FJ     NJ    NB    and NC     Making     II2GEExiallC T6 or Il 1    EEx iallC T6    Manufacturer  Pepperl   Fuchs GmbH    Address  Lilienthalstrasse 200  68307 Mannheim  Germany    Description of supplements and modifications   In the future the cuboidal inductive sensors of types FJ    NJ    NB    and NC    may also be  manufactured and operated as described in the test documents listed in the test report PTB Ex 08   26271     The modifications concern the extension of type series NB      the internal construction  further  alternative casting compound and alternativ
33.   The feeded gas has to be kept free of air or oxygen in such a way that it is ensured that no  potentionally explosive atmosphere can occur    3  The gas must always be purged outwards    Essential Health and Safety Requirements    no additional ones    page 2 2    BA 02 11 03     16    17      18     Translation       2  SUPPLEMENT to    EC TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE No  TUV 99 ATEX 1487 X    of the company  ABB Automation Products GmbH  Schillerstra  e 72  D 32425 Minden    When operated with combustible gases the I P transformer type DOC 901069 as  pneumatic auxiliary power may be installed outdoors resp  indoors when sufficient  ventilation is given  see 17  Special conditions for safe use       All other data apply unchanged     The test documents are listed in the test report N   04YEX551065 1     Special conditions for safe use    When operated with combustible gases the UP transformer type DOC 901069 as pneumatic  auxiliary power has to be installed outdoors resp  indoors when sufficient ventilation is given     The supplied gas has to be kept free of air or oxygen so that it cannot form an explosive  atmosphere     The exhaust gases must always be exhausted outside     Essential Health and Safety Requirements  no additional ones    T  V NORD CERT GmbH  amp  Co  KG Hanover  2004 07 08  TUV CERT Certification Body   Am TUV 1   D 30519 Hannover   Tel  0511 986 1470   Fax  0511 986 2555    Head ofthe  Certification Body    page 1 1    Gerate Applikationen             
34.   This equipment or protective system and any acceptable variation thereto is specified in the  schedule to this certificate and the documents therein referred to     8  The TUV Hannover Sachsen Anhalt e V   TUV Certification Body N   0032 in accordance with  Article 9 of the Council Directive 94 9 EC of March 23  1994  certifies that this equipment or  protective system has been found to comply with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements  krelating to the design and construction of equipment and protective systems intended for use  in potentially explosive atmospheres given in Annex II to the Directive    The examination and test results are recorded in confidential report N  99 PX23890     9  Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements has been assured by  compliance with    EN 50 014 1997 EN 50 020 1994    10  If the sign  X  is placed after the certification number  it indicates that the equipment or  protective system is subject to special conditions for safe use specified in the schedule to this  certificate       11  This EC type examination certificate relates only to the design and construction of the specified  equipment or protective system  If applicable  further requirements of this Directive apply to the  manufacture and supply of this equipment or protective system     12  The marking of the equipment or protective system shall include the following          2G EExia iC T6   T  V Hannover Sachsen Anhalt e V  Hannover  1999 10 29   TUV CER
35.   amp     SPAN    settings may NEVER  overlap     These values are achieved during positioner calibration by adjusting the    ZERO    screw and  SPAN  screw settings   see Figure 3 8 for screw locations        Normal  Range     24 mA  mA malt 760  Ending g  Point 13 6 mA  10 4 mA    Starting Note   Point Can NOT Overlap    2 4 mA       September 2012 3 9    Cam Indexing and Positioner Calibration SD760          3 10 September 2012    SD760 Option Kit Installation       4 0 OPTION KIT INSTALLATION    This section describes installation of several popular option kits in a 760 Valve Positioner  Locate the option kit to  be installed in the following table  in the    Option Kit    column  Refer to the    See Section    column for an installation  procedure for that kit  An exploded view of the positioner is in the Parts List section     IMPORTANT    When all options have been installed  install the cover and tighten the four cover  screws to 20 Ib in  2 3 N m            Option Kit See Section          Mechanical Limit Switches and Proximity Sensors   4 20 mAdc Current Feedback Option  4 1 PC Board Based Option Kits  1K Potentiometer Feedback Option                                               Beacon and Flat Indicator Kits  4 2 Indicators Kits  Feedback Lever and Rotary Shaft Kits   4 3 Feedback Lever and Rotary Shaft Kits  I P Transducer Kit   4 4 I P Transducer Kit  Flow Output  Spool  Kits   4 5 Flow Output  Spool  Kits  750 Adapter Plate 4 6 Model 750 Adapter Plate     ndex 
36.   see section 15 1     special conditions for safe use      C      Project Number 52  16928 C Ellaby    C  Index 11 Certification Officer    This certificate and its schedules may only be  reproduced in its entirety and without change     Sira Certification Service    Rake Lane  Eccleston  Chester  CH4 9JN  England    Page 1 of 4    Form 9400 Issue 1 Tel   44  0  1244 670900    Fax   44  0  1244 681330  Email  info siracertification com    Web  www siracertification com    sira    CERTIFICATION    SCHEDULE    EC TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE Sira 03ATEX2577X  Issue 1    13 DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT    The Series 760E and 760P Valve Controllers are designed to be mounted on a valve to drive an  actuator that positions the valve in proportion to an electrical input signal  they also feed back the valve  position and line pressure information to control circuitry located in a non hazardous area  They  comprise a number of separate parts housed within a metal enclosure that can be fitted with an  optional transparent    Lexan    dome that permits a valve position indicator to be viewed  External  electrical connections are made to the terminal blocks via a threaded entry that accommodates conduit  or cable  A number of other threaded entries permit the pneumatic connections     The Model 760E has the I P converter fitted and the Model 760P does not     The Valve Controllers are intended to be configured so that all or some of the separate parts  listed as  items 1  2  and 3 below  
37.   so   39   54   61  NJ6 22 SN Ga   110   150   76   91   100   73   88   100   62   77   81   54   63   63  NJ6S1 Ua Na   180   150   73   88   100   69   84   100   51   66   so   39   54   61  NJ6 F Na   70   100   73   88   100   66   81   100   45   60   89   30   45   74  NJ8 18GK SNa  120   200   73   88   100   69   84   100   51   66   so   39   54   61  NJ10 30GK SNa   120   150   73   ss   100   69   84   100   51   66   so   39   54   61  NJ10 F Na   85   100   73   ss   100   66   s     100   45   60   89   30   45   74          Dieses Dokument enth  lt sicherheitsrelevante Angaben  Es darf nicht ohne Absprache mit dem Normenfachmann ge  ndert werden        This document contains safety relevant information  It must not be altered without the authorization of the norm expert                                Confidential according to ISO 16016 Only valid as long as released in EDM or with a valid production documentation  Scale  1 1 date  2010 jun 03  Control Drawing h ti respons    US DRL  FAPEPPERL FUCHS      Jun sensons ou         iwona usona  116 01 65F      150  1915  Twinsburg norm US GAP sheet 4 of 8                            TABLE 8   INDUCTIVE SENSORS  NJ15    TO NJ50                     1        2        3        4   16V Ui 16 V Ui  16 V Ui 16 V  i 25mA Ii   25 mA Ii   52 mA Ii   76 mA         34 mW Pi   64 mW Pi   169 mW Pi   242 mW  Li  NJ15 Ua Na 88   100     100   74    NJ15 30GK SNa           esl onl tan cee ee oo a 61  NJ15 Mla Na   140   100   73  
38.  1  Groups C and D T4  Ta    85  C   See Table 12    9  Warning   Equipment with non metallic enclosures shall not be installed in a location where the external  conditions are conducive to the build up of electrostatic charge on such surfaces  The equipment shall  only be cleaned with a damp cloth    Dieses Dokument enth  lt sicherheitsrelevante Angaben  Es darf nicht ohne Absprache mit dem Normenfachmann ge  ndert werden   This document contains safety relevant information  It must not be altered without the authorization of the norm expert   Confidential according to ISO 16016 Only valid as long as released in EDM or with a valid production documentation  Scale  1 1 date  2010 jun 03  Control Drawing change notice respons    US DRL   JPEPPERL  FUCHS 116 0165F    NAMUR SENSORS   FM 150 1915 Ur  URS  Twinsburg norm US GAP sheet 1 of 8                         TABLE 1     CAPACITIVE SENSORS  CJ   CC   CB                  1        2        3        4  01  16   01   16 V 01   16   01  16       Ii   25 mA Ii   52 mA Ii   76 mA    34 mW Pi   64 mW Pi   169 mW Pi   242 mW    Model rem  CBN2 F46 Na 45 rs o olele    2  wpa s  s      37  CBNS F46 Na   45   0  73 78   78   67   72   72  46  S1   51  32   37   37  CBNS FA6A Na  as   0  73  78   78   67  72   72   46   51   51  32  37   37  CCNS FA6A Na  as   0  73   78   78   67  72   72   46   51   s    32  37   37  CCB10 30GMa Na  155  0  74   89   96   70   85   ss  s4   6t        42   43         CCN2 FA6A Na  as   0  73  78   78   6
39.  1991   A1 2    000  is met     3  For relationship between type of the connected circuit  maximum permissible ambient temperature  and temperature class as well as the effective internal reactances for the individual types of  cuboidal inductive sensors  reference is made to tables 1 and 2 given in this 5  supplement to EC     type examination certifcate PT    B 00 ATEX 2032 X     4  When the following types of cuboidal inductive sensors are applied corresponding to explosion  groups and equipment categories tabulated below  inadmissible electrostatic charge of the plastic  housing has to be avoided  The equipment shall be labelled with an appropriate warning note     Type    FJ 7 N     NCB2 F1 NO     NCB2 V3 NO     NBN3 F69 NO     NBN4 V3 NO     NBN4 V3 NO Y 189289  NBB15 U K NO     NBB20 U K NO     NBN30 U K NO     NBN40 U K NO     NCN4 V3 NO     NCB15 U    NO          Application Application as  as category 1   category 2  equipment equipment  IIB IC IIC   IIC  IIC  IIC  IIC                                         IIC  IIC IIC  IIC  IIC IIC       NCN15 M    NO    NCB20 L2 NO     NCN20 U    NO     NCN30 U    NO     NCB40 FP NO    NCN40 U    NO     NCN40 L2 NO     NCN50 FP NO     NJ 2 5 F N      NJ 2 F1 N                         NNNM MM    EL LE    IIC          IIC   IC                 III   IIC                   IIC    IIC                      Sheet 5 7                      EC type examination Certificates without signature and official stamp shall not be valid  The certif
40.  1994  certifies that this equipment has been found to comply with the Essential Health and Safety  Requirements relating to the design and construction of equipment intended for use in potentially explosive  atmospheres given in Annex li to the Directive    The examination and test results are recorded in confidential report number 3030620EC dated 15  June  2007    9 Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements  with the exception of those identified in  item 15 of the schedule to this certificate  has been assessed by compliance with the following documents   EN 60079 0 2006 and EN 60079 11 2007    10 Ifthe sign    X    is placed after the certificate number  it indicates that the equipment is subject to special  conditions for safe use specified in the schedule to this certificate     11 This EC Type Examination certificate relates only to the design  examination and tests of the specified  equipment or protective system in accordance to the directive 94 9 EC  Further requirements of the Directive  apply to the manufacturing process and supply of this equipment or protective system  These are not  covered by this certificate    12 The marking of the equipment or protective system shall include         1G  ExiallC T          55  C to Ta max   Temperature class and maximum ambient temperature as indicated on Page 2               Andrew W e  Gener          FM Approvals Ltd  FM Approvals    Issue date  yat e E 2 7 EEE TER    THIS CERTIFICATE MAY ONLY BE REPRODU
41.  28V 3 36 W T5  55  C to  55  C   100 mA  T5  55  C to  55  C 100        30V 3W T5  55  C to  70  C   60 mA  T5  55  C to  70  C 60 mA 38 8 V   2 328 W T4  55  C to  70  C   150 mA  T4  55  C to  70  C 150 mA   25 5 V   3 825 W T4  55  C to  80  C   120 mA  T4  55  C to  80  C 120        28V 3 36 W T4  55  C to  85  C   100 mA  T4  55  C to  85  C 100 mA   30V 3 W T4  55  C to  85  C   60 mA  T4  55  C to  85  C 60 mA 38 8 V   2 328 W  Table 2  4     20 mA PCB  TB1   1 2 3 or Potentiometer  6920 Series   TB1   1 2 3  Max  amb    Device Temp  Parameters  temp  class   gt 40   lt 80  C   Potentiometer T4 Ii   69 0 mA  Pi   0 63 W   T5 Ii   42 6 mA  Pi   0 24 W   lt 40  C Potentiometer T4 Ii   80 0 mA  Pi   0 92 W   T5 Ii   69 0 mA  Pi   0 63 W   T6 Ii   42 6mA  Pi   0 24 W   4     20 mA PCB T4 Ui   30 V  Ii   110 mA  Pi   0 78 W  Ci   49 nF  Li   20 uH                   This certificate and its schedules may only be    reproduced in its entirety and without change  Sira Certification Service  Rake Lane  Eccleston  Chester  CH4 9JN  England  Tel   44  0  1244 670900  F 9400 I 1 Page 3 of 4 Fax   44  0  1244 681330  om          Email  info siracertification com    Web  www siracertification com    sira    CERTIFICATION    SCHEDULE    EC TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE Sira 03ATEX2577X  Issue 1    Table 3  Proximity Switches  TB2 1  2  3 and TB2 4  5  6 or Limit Switches  TB2 1  2  3 and             TB2 4  5  6  Max  amb    Device Temp  Parameters  temp  class   gt 80   lt 85  C   Li
42.  4   inch diameter feedback pin   NAMUR style  or 0 5 inch square  See Figures 2 5 and 2 11        Input shaft O ring configuration revised  External dimensions shown in Figure 2 1     Input shaft with one of the following integral shaft ends  feedback lever  with slot for 1 4     inch diameter feedback pin   NAMUR style  or 0 5 inch square  See Figure 2 5 and 2 11        Universal input shaft with D shaped shaft end to accept a NAMUR style adapter  square  adapter  or linear adapter introduced  See Figures 2 2 and 2 3     Feedback lever and retaining clip revised  Slot in feedback lever increased in width to accept  5 16 inch feedback pin     All enclosures have a 3 4 inch NPT conduit connection  An adapter is supplied when an M25  conduit connection is specified           1 3 OPTIONAL KITS    An option kit can be installed either at the factory or on site by the installer  Several examples are described below     e Bracket Kit     Order a Siemens bracket kit to mount the positioner on a particular actuator  specify  manufacturer and model   Table 1 4 lists common bracket kits  Each kit includes mounting bracket  hardware   installation instructions  and other parts as required  Typically  a feedback kit  input shaft kit or  adapter feedback lever  is also ordered  A custom bracket kit may be ordered if an existing kit is not available     e Mechanical Feedback Kit     Order a Siemens feedback kit to couple the actuator shaft to the positioner input  shaft  Installation inst
43.  4 NPT to M25 Metric Conduit Adapter  Stainless Steel  Design Level D 16300 1439  Output Options  Circuit Board Based Kits  and Spool Options   Mechanical Limit Switches Kit  2  SPDT 16300 500   Proximity Limit Switches Kit  2  NAMUR type 16300 501   1KQ Feedback Potentiometer Kit  Approx  9180 for 90    6120 for 60   rotary operation  16300 503   4 to 20 mAdc Feedback Kit 16300 502   Mechanical Limit Switches and 1KQ Feedback Potentiometer Kit  Approximately 9180 for 90      6120 for 60   rotary operation  16300505  Mechanical Limit Switches and 4 to 20 mAdc Feedback Kit 16300 504  Proximity Limit Switches and 1KO Feedback Potentiometer Kit  Approximately 9180 for 90      6120 for 60   rotary operation  16300 507  Proximity Limit Switches and 4 to 20 mAdc Feedback Kit 16300 506  1KQ Feedback Potentiometer Kit w SS feedback gear  Approximately 9180 for 90    6120 for 60   16300 580   rotary operation    4 to 20 mAdc Feedback Kit w SS feedback gear 16300 577  Mechanical Limit Switches and 1KO Feedback Potentiometer Kit w SS feedback gear 16300 581    Approximately 9180 for 90    6120 for 60   rotary operation    Mechanical Limit Switches and 4 to 20 mAdc Feedback Kit w SS feedback gear 16300 578  Proximity Limit Switches and 1KQ Feedback Potentiometer Kit w SS feedback gear 16300 582    Approximately 9180 for 90    6120 for 60   rotary operation    Proximity Limit Switches and 4 to 20 mAdc Feedback Kit w SS feedback gear 16300 579  Note  Above listed options are limited to sta
44.  68   96   49   61   89   28   40  50  5   68   96   49   61   89   28   40    50   56   68   96   49   61   89   28   40   NJ 3 V3 N      40   50   56   68   96   49   61   89   28   40    150   100   56   68   96   49   61   89   28   40         A            NIN   00100   BIR   ojo                 NJ 10 F N    85   100   56   68   96   49   61   89   28  130   56   68   96   49   61   89   28    NJ 15 M1  N      140   100   56   68   96   49   61   89     NJ20 U  N    150   130   56   68   96   49   61   89    150   170   56   68   96   49   61   89    NJ 40    4N    180   130   56   68   96   49   61   89  NJ 50 FP N     360   56   68   96   49   61   89   28  Tabelle 1  Einsatz als Kategorie 1 Gerat       A                              NJ 30P U  1N                NININ  AL            AiR  ojo                                           Seite 3 6    EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigungen ohne Unterschrift und ohne Siegel haben keine G  ltigkeit   Diese EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung darf nur unver  ndert weiterverbreitet werden   Ausz  ge oder   nderungen bed  rfen der Genehmigung der Physikalisch Technischen Bundesanstalt     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt   Bundesallee 100   D 38116 Braunschweig       Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt    Braunschweig und Berlin  4  Erganzung zur EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X    T H  chstzul  ssige Umgebungstemperatur in   C bei Einsatz in  Temperaturklasse        T    FJ 6 110 N    150  FJ 7 N    100   45   60     
45.  73   s8   100   68   83   100   49   64   67   36   a2     NJ 1 5 10GM N Y      20   so   73   88   100   68   83   100   49   64   67   36   42     NJ 1 5 8GM N      30   so   73   88   100   68   83   100   49   64   67   36   42     NJ 1 5 8 N             20   so  73   88   100   68   83   100   49   64   67   36   a2     NJ 1 5 18GM N D      50   60   76   91   100   73   88   100   62   77   81_  54   63     NJ 2 11 N     as   50   73   88   100   66   81   100   45   60   89   30   as     NJ 2 11 N G    130   so  76   91   100   73   88   100   62  77   s     54   63     NJ2 12GK N    4  50   73   88   100   69   84   100   SI   66   so   39   54     NJ 2 12GM N          30   so  76   91   100   73   88   100   62  77   s     54   63     NJ2 14GM N       30   so   76   91   100   73   88   100   62   77   s     54   63     NJ 2 5 14GM N          30   so   76   91   100   73   88   100   62   77        54   63     NJ 4 12GK N         4s   so  73   88   100   69   84   100   s    66   so  39   54     NJ4 14GK N     45   50   73   88   100   69   84   100   SI   66   so   39   54     NJ4 12GM N     45   so   73   88   100   68   83   100   49   64   67   36   42          4 30GM N 200   _   70   100   73   88   100   66   81   100   45   co          30   as     NJ 5 10 11 N          70   100   73   88   100   66   81   100   45   60   78   30   as     NJ 5 11 N         4s so  72   87   100   65   so   100   42  57   82  26   a1     NJ 5 18GK N        70   so   73   88   10
46.  88   100   66   SI   100   45   60   89   30   45   74  NJ15S Ua Na  180  150   73   88   100   66   81   100   45   co   89   30   45   74  NJ20 Ua Na   150   130   73   88   100   66   SI   100   45   60   89   30   45   74  NJ20S Ua Na   200   150   73   88   100   66   SI   100   45   60   89   30   45   74  NJ30 Ua Na   160   130   73   88   100   66   81   100   45   co   89   30   45   74  NJ30P Ua 1Na  150   170   73   88   100   66   SI   100   45   60   89   30   45   74  NJ40 a Na  180  130   73   88   100   66   81   100   45   co   89   30   45   74  NJ40 Ua Na  180  130   73   88   100   66   SI   100   45   60   89   30   45   74  NJ40 FP SNa  370   300   73   88   100   66   SI   100   45   60   89   30   45   74  NJ50 FP Na   320            73   88   100   66   81   100   45   60   s9   30   45   74                Dieses Dokument enth  lt sicherheitsrelevante Angaben  Es darf nicht ohne Absprache mit dem Normenfachmann ge  ndert werden        This document contains safety relevant information  It must not be altered without the authorization of the norm expert                 Confidential according to ISO 16016 Only valid as long as released in EDM or with a valid production documentation  Scale  1 1 date  2010 jun 03  change notice respons  US DRL 1 1 6 01 65F    Control Drawing  FAPEPPERL FUCHS       ceNSORS_    EM           emoes  US DWR                            Twinsburg norm US GAP sheet 5 of 8             TABLE 9         INDUCTIVE SENSORS  NCB1 5    
47.  Contaminants will affect  spool performance                 1  Remove supply pressure from the Positioner and then remove the positioner cover   2  Model 760E only  Remove the I P Transducer and manifold  see Section 4 4  Save all hardware and O rings for  later installation   3  At the spool block  see Figure 4 12   carefully note how the spool retaining clip is installed   e At the top of the block  the clip is inserted in the countersink in the end of the spool  e At the bottom of the block  the clip is in the bronze bushing in the underside of the beam assembly   4  Remove and discard the spool retaining clip   Insert spool  long journal  first  in direction shown   Spool Retaining See spool detail below   Clip Spool Block  pool Bloc      Vent Hole  2     Spool  Long  Journal          ___   Figure 4 12 Output Capacity Spool Kit  4 12 September 2012    SD760 Option Kit Installation       5  Remove and discard two spool block retaining screws  the spool block  spool  and gasket under the block   6  Orient the spool block from the kit with the vent hole to the left as shown in Figure 4 12     7  Remove the new spool from its tubular container  Place a finger over the spool hole in the bottom of the spool  block to prevent the spool from falling through the block  Insert the spool  long journal first  into the top of the  spool block  The spool should drop through the block under its own weight     8  Select a spool block gasket  see the detail below  from the Output Capacit
48.  Die Kennzeichnung   ndert sich daraufhin wie folgt         112GExiallC T6 bzw  Il 1    Ex iallC T6    Die EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung wird um folgende Typen der quaderf  rmigen induktiven  Sensoren erweitert     NBB15 U K NO     NBB20 U K NO     NBN30 U K NO     NBN40 U K NO       Seite 1 7                eg    EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigungen ohne Unterschrift und ohne Siegel haben keine G  ltigkeit   Diese EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung darf nur unver  ndert weiterverbreitet werden   Ausz  ge oder   nderungen bed  rfen der Genehmigung der Physikalisch Technischen Bundesanstalt     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt     Bundesallee 100    38116 Braunschweig  Deutschland       Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt    Braunschweig und Berlin  5  Erganzung zur EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X    Zur besseren Verstandlichkeit werden die  Elektrischen Daten  sowie die Tabellen  welche die  Zusammenh  nge zwischen den h  chstzul  ssigen Umgebungstemperaturen  den Temperaturklassen   den  Elektrischen Daten    sowie den Ger  tekategorien herstellen  f  r alle Typen der quaderf  rmigen    induktiven Sensoren nachfolgend dargestellt   Des weiteren werden die ge  nderten    Besonderen Bedingungen  bezogen auf alle Typen dieser EG     Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung dargestellt     Elektrische Daten    Auswerte  und  Versorgungsstromkreis                        in Z  ndschutzart Eigensicherheit Ex ia IIC IIB  bzw  Ex ib IIC IIB    nur zum Anschluss an bescheinigte e
49.  EN60079 0     THIS CERTIFICATE MAY ONLY BE REPRODUCED IN ITS ENTIRETY AND WITHOUT CHANGE  FM Approvals Ltd  1 Windsor Dials  Windsor  Berkshire  UK  SL4 1RS    T   44  0  1753 750 000 F   44  0  1753 868 700 E mail  atex fmapprovals com www fmalobal com    FM F ATEX 029  Feb 07  Page 2 of 4    SCHEDULE FM Approvals     Mrd of  ke FM Gida              to Type Examination Certificate No  FMO7ATEX0003X    Special Conditions for Safe Use  continued      5  The User shall permanently mark the protection type chosen  Once the type of protection  has been marked it shall not be changed     15 Essential Health and Safety Requirements   The relevant EHSRs that have not been addressed by the standards listed in this certificate have been  identified and assessed in the confidential report identified in item 8   16 Test and Assessment Procedure and Conditions   This Type Examination Certificate is the result of testing of a sample of the product submitted  in  accordance with the provisions of the relevant specific standard s   and assessment of supporting  documentation  It does not imply an assessment of the whole production   Whilst this certificate may be used in support of a manufacturer s claim for CE Marking  FM Approvals  Ltd accepts no responsibility for the compliance of the equipment against all applicable Directives in all  applications   This Certificate has been issued in accordance with FM Approvals Ltd s ATEX Certification Scheme   17 Approved Drawings    Drawing No  Re
50.  I   20A 10 Of             10 1N    UITIOYLNOI    AOL  USM urojs  s    se                  ur peururexo    eorjr  eds Jou                      Anus             YPM SAAP JLS Apeorsunug OM  JO uonoouuooJo1ur oui SMOTTe 1doouoo              1       IsULNUT ou 09    see  9po   EILNOOTT uerpeuv    epeue     A3INASNVAL  0661                        Sutra uoneoo                                            UOISIAI  OL VdHN ISNV  POD 182119919  euoneN  SN                                      UT                 oq o  SIOONPSUBL   SUONEIO   payisse o   43TIOMLINOO snopiezeq    pue            g       sdnoio   z u       1 55 0 107 aide        suun  vououry qo         suonejeisur X  od  107 onsopouo          v ur pojunour oq Isnur spun  eououry YON        payro  ads                      uone            ABroUg        uonejfeisut  edo  o qeo dde   y  y  m oouepaooov    oq preys uoneqrisu   Xa  Lv   W3lSAS Q3ZIuv10d   T3NNYHO    apog LILO uerpeuv   AP jo gT uonoas        eouepiooo  ur aq            uonejjeisuf  epeuv                    OML   ABZ  0L Vd3N ISNV    A3INASNVAL           vounoo 3                ou JO 006              pur    SUONLIOT  patjisse     snopezer 107 SWAS     aire   O6SL Ap eotsurnug Jo uonejeisur  10 90 ZLd l VSI ISNV WIM oouepioooe ut oq ppnoys uoneqpeisu   SN        Od 6 v6                 KALV op        Kjduroo preys snjereddy pojeroossy 1910 10 sIoLLIeg SI L  XALV     3311031NO2                       Pause  snopsezey         I SSP D 10    0 2007     I SSEJO 10  B QeIIN
51.  Installation Considerations  Then perform the Mechanical Installation procedure on page 2 12   A typical Siemens rotary bracket kit is used to mount the positioner on a rotary actuator and a Siemens feedback kit  is used to couple the actuator shaft to the positioner input shaft  If another mounting bracket and feedback linkage  will be installed  use this procedure as a guide   Note   Refer to the Kit Installation Instructions supplied in Siemens bracket kits and adapter   kits to mount the positioner and install the feedback linkage   Installation Considerations    e The positioner may be mounted in any orientation but it must be rigidly mounted to the actuator     e Align actuator shaft and positioner input shaft centerlines to minimize friction and binding as the shafts  rotate     minimize backlash for best accuracy     e When the positioner is mounted  the pneumatic ports must be accessible for piping and the electrical  conduit entrance must be accessible for wiring  allow sufficient space for conduit runs  Remove pipe plugs  just prior to piping and installing conduit     Siemens ValvePAC 760                         KS     s NAMUR Adapter  Design       Level D  or integral shaft end  Mounting Bracket              gt   Design Levels A and B      eg Actuator Shaft  Typical Rotary         Actuator A   aN       Assembled View of Actuator and   UL a Positioner  Ka         Figure 2 12 Positioner with Rotary Actuator Example       September 2012 2 11    Installation SD760  
52.  Neoprene Nylon                                    1    196   163002339   Gasket  Opt  Flnorosilicone Dacron                        1          is      1630045      F SpeiSd amp loCawy _             O O O       1          is   16300146   Spool  Hi Capacity       O      o       1           9         Spool Clip  1     16303    Diaphragm gd             21  163047   Diaphragm  NeopreneINylon                         O Jo 1                   forme ___                                                                                                                                                                   16300 447 Input Shaft  Linear 4      Design Level        16300 448 Input Shaft  Linear 6      Design Level A B  16300 231 Manifold Plate       Drawing No  16300 125PL  Rev December 2011 PARTS LIST    O Ring  Opt  Speed Adjusters   See Note 5         3s  1 1005                    6    36  is          8 32 x 1 4 Lg                   Converter  7008 only      Order repair kit 16300 1355   1    40a                    400  16300334   Manifold Block  TE     O SSC O    aa  1235 Screw   760P  10 32 x 3 8 Lg  Binding Head            aw  1280   Screw   760E  10 32x 2 174 Lg  Binding Head           1           42  37528   BemSmew           2            43 r5   Screw  8 32 x 7716 Lg  Flea       Cd    44 i234         10 32 x 3 8 Lg  Slotted Hex  Washer Head       1         as osans           46 i209   Screw  832 x 34 bg  Binding ead O                2            eos        _               
53.  Proximity Switch  1 and  2 and I P Module  25  C to  75  C  Limit Switch  1 and  2  40  C to  85  C  Limit Switch  1 and  2 and I P Module  40  C to  75  C  Proximity Switch  1 and  2  25  C to  85  C  Proximity Switch  1 and  2 and I P Module  25  C to  75  C  I P Module   ABB  40  C to  75  C  I P Module     ControlAir  40  C to  75  C                                                       Details Approved Title    J  Sweeney Control Drawing for  J  Sweeney    J  Sweeney Series 760 Valve Controller    19 May 08   Minor correction pg 13   J  Sweeney    22 June 11 Correct pg 12  add SII J  Sweeney  Siemens Industry  Inc   Spring House PA  USA 19477 15032 7602 Sheet 2 of 13    Drawing No        4 20 mA Feedback Board Installation    4 20 mA Feedback Board Intrinsically Safe Installation    Safe Area Hazardous Area  see sheet 1 for details     Control Room    Equipment  Feedback    Board    Barrier must be CSA Certified and FM Approved  single channel grounded shunt   diode Zener Barrier    or single channel Isolating Barrier 4 20 mA Feedback Board Entity Parameters   Vmax  or Vt Imax  It Ci Li  Entity Installation requirements  30    225 mA 49 nF 44 uH    Vmax or Vt 2 Voc  Imax or It  gt  Isc   Ca 2 Ci      cable  La  gt  Li   Leable    4 20 mA Feedback Board Division 2 FM Approved and CSA Certified     Maximum Voltage  42V  Current  4 20 mA    4 20 mA Feedback Board Ambient Temperature Range  See Sheet 2 of 13    Details Approved Title    J  Sweeney Control Drawing for    J  
54.  Test  Measuring and  Process Control Equipment           Anhang A ist integraler Bestandteil dieser Erkl  rung   Annex A is integral part of this declaration Diese Erkl  rung bescheinigt die   bereinstimmung mit den genannten Richtlinien  ist jedoch keine Zusicherung von  Eigenschaften    Die Sicherheitshinweise der mitgelieferten Produktdokumentation sind zu beachten    This declaration certifies the conformity to the specified directives but contains no assurance of properties  The safety documentation accompanying the product shall be considered in    detail   Page 2 6      SIEMENS    Anhang EG Konformitatserklarung  EC Declaration of Conformity    No  A5E00362252     Directive 94 9 EC Explosive Atmospheres    Conformance to directive 94 9 EC is based on an EC     Type Examination Certificate and Type examination certificate  issued by Sira  notified body number 0518 in accordance with article 9 of the Council Directive 94 9 EC of 23 March  1994  The technical basis of compliance with EHSR of the directive is EN 50014 plus a review against EN 60079   0 2006 which showed that there were no changes which materially affected the state of technological progress with  respect to the product     General requirements standard EN 50014 has been replaced by EN 60079 0  Type of protection n standard EN 50021  have been replaced by EN 60079 15 and Intrinsic safety standard EN 50020 has been replaced by EN 60079 11 The  model 760 was evaluated for compliance with these new standards 
55.  bescheinigt  sind  betrieben werden  Die Kategorie sowie die Explosionsgruppe der eigensicheren quader   f  rmigen induktiven Sensoren  richtet sich nach dem angeschlossenen  speisenden eigen   sicheren Stromkreis     Elektrische Daten    Auswerte  und  Versorgungsstromkreis               in Z  ndschutzart Eigensicherheit EEx ia IIC IIB  bzw  EEx ib IIC IIB  nur zum Anschlu   an bescheinigte eigensichere Stromkreise  H  chstwerte           16V  1  76 mA   P    34 mW       64 mW        169 mw        242 mw    Der Zusammenhang zwischen dem Typ des angeschlossenen Stromkreises  der h  chstzul  s   sigen Umgebungstemperatur und der Temperaturklasse sowie den wirksamen inneren Reak   tanzen f  r die einzelnen Typen der quaderf  rmigen induktiven Sensoren ist der Tabelle zu  entnehmen         Seite 2 4    EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigungen ohne Unterschrift und ohne Siegel haben keine G  ltigkeit   Diese EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung darf nur unver  ndert weiterverbreitet werden   Ausz  ge oder Anderungen bed  rfen der Genehmigung der Physikalisch Technischen Bundesanstalt     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt    Bundesallee 100     D 38116 Braunschweig    PIB    Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt    Braunschweig und Berlin    Anlage zur EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X       Typ 1           74      Tit dil hl lul Dd Dd Nul                                                                      1O   O  O  O  N  O  V               LD   LO      LD  10   LO   LO  
56.  blunt  small diameter tool   gently press the filter into the hole  Be careful to not damage or puncture the filter  The filter should evenly     cup    as it is pressed into the hole  Fully insert the filter and install the access screw     Install the positioner cover  Tighten four cover screws to 20 Ib  in   2 3 N m      Test the positioner for proper operation     5 4 RETURN FOR REPAIR    See Section 1 4 Customer Product Support for details concerning returning a positioner to the factory for repair   Also  note the following     Package assembly in original shipping materials  Otherwise  package for safe shipment or contact Siemens for  shipping recommendations     An uninstalled circuit board with semiconductor components must be placed inside a static shielding bag to  protect it from electrostatic discharge        September 2012          19497 uBiseq            pepojdx3 Joo uo            09  SEAS LLOZ 1                ez 1 00E91    ON Buimesq suawials    90 31995    16300 125 Rev F     d09Z  67   3092  0      3z  9    p    PR  S dei         An DI  N ee Le D  18 CE LG         6     E  e    mue     Ov    6      q  ol 87  Ne det      801  Ci  a  us        M E m                    PARTS LIST Drawing No  16300 125PL  Rev December 2011  SIEMENS SERIES 760 VALVE CONTROLLER    Parts List Notes  1  Some items may not be available for separate purchase     2  An   indicates a recommended on hand spare part  order Spare Parts Kit PN 16300 686  Include nameplate information  whe
57.  green beacon indicator  and pressure gauges   as shown on the cover of this manual  Output options include 4 20 mA feedback  1K Q potentiometer feedback   mechanical limit switches  and proximity switches  These options can be easily added in the field     This manual is divided into five sections  Introduction  Installation  Cam Indexing and Positioner Calibration   Option Kit Installation  and Maintenance  A Parts List with an exploded view drawing of the positioner follows the  Maintenance section     IMPORTANT    This publication is for positioner design levels A  B  and D  Information that applies to a  specific design level s  is identified by the words Design Level and the appropriate  letter s      Save this manual  It should be available to those installing  configuring  operating  and  servicing the subject positioners  See Section 1 4 Customer Product Support to download  the current revision of this publication     The Cam Indexing and Positioner Calibration section and other procedures specify an  input signal of 3 15 psig  760P  or 4 20 mA  760E   If other engineering units  e g  kPa   are to be used  substitute the equivalent values for the specified values for best accuracy     1 4 SPECIFICATIONS    Functional and performance specifications for Model 760P Pneumatic and Model 760E Electro Pneumatic Valve  Positioners are listed below  Table 1 1 lists positioner specifications for each of the four major options  For  installation in a hazardous location  see Co
58.  haben keine G  ltigkeit   Diese EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung darf nur unver  ndert weiterverbreitet werden   Ausz  ge oder Anderungen bed  rfen der Genehmigung der Physikalisch Technischen Bundesanstalt     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt e Bundesallee 100    D 38116 Braunschweig       Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt  Braunschweig und Berlin  5  Erg  nzung zur EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X         NJ 3 V3 N       NJ AEN     pup ceu  er    dec        BET Mp Een             NJ 15 0                NJ 15 M1 N     0g              NJ 20 U 4N       NJ8 USN      IC  IC                      IC                              5  Bei den folgenden Typen der quaderf  rmigen induktiven Sensoren ist die unzulassige  elektrostatische Aufladung der Metallgeh  useteile zu vermeiden  Gef  hrliche elektrostatische  Aufladungen der Metallgeh  useteile k  nnen durch Erdung dieser Metallgeh  useteile vermieden  werden  wobei sehr kleine Metallgehauseteile  z B  Schrauben  nicht geerdet werden m  ssen     NJ 40     N     NJ 50 FP N          FJ 6 110 N    NCB40 FP NO P3    NJ 15 M1 N V  FJ 7 N    NCB40 FP NO P4    NJ 20 U3 4N     NBB15 U3K NO    NCN20 U3 N0    NJ 20 U44N     NBB15 UAK NO    NCN20 U4 N0    NJ 30 03        NBB20 U3K NO    NCN30 U3 N0    NJ 30 U4 4N     NBB20 U4K NO    NCN30 U4 N0    NJ 30P U3 1N     NBN30 U3K NO    NCNA40 L2 NO    NJ 30P U4 1N     NBN30 UAK NO    NCN40 U3 N0    NJ 40 U3 4N     NBN40 U3K NO    NCN40 U4 N0    NJ 40 U4 4N     NBN40 U4K NO 
59.  i   9ISd SI E   2 vu 02 4 v  JADY 335  M ezcz     sec  vw 09  2 58  v1    VIAL Zeg A8 HRS e 08   IER     WEIS INdNI   D    06S  8  8     gt     0 5 8     gt    gt    gt     iN  ro          en   gt  gt      gt     SL          00 F XXX Gre   vw o9  oss  91    WAOMddV X31V J  Ir      IM          A Szy        os   5 09   91   SNOILdO    AVMOVIO NOLLO3NNOOW3INI Ces         Fake 1304 1   8 1 d      140d GIOINVW W  SS VSN HN  ISU3HNV    ONT SIVIOSLNOD 40 NOLLVZIMDHIQV N3LITA LnDHLIA SN3HID OL 0350712510 SH3L3WVHVd ONILIATI  AOH3N3 NOILO3NNOO    Ju  JIV OJ1UO Dm sn                Kring 7031905 geen 38 LON        ONY    ONE ve aen 30    AlM3dDMd TWILNZOLINOD JAY  S3SUTOSIG LI NOLLVWADANI JHL ONY  ONIAVHO SIHL     gt   joo          OPAO    3O 39VL1OA INdNI vw 02 7 3HL    SNLYYYddY G3LIWI  A9M3N3 Q310310Nd 3135 303 SSVIO JYNLVYAdWAL 91       MO138 319                        5         A9N3N3 33S x    0 98  OL 2 95  01 491 ON TU vu X3 9     II  2 88 OL 2 55  01 spl Oll 1   X3 9     Il XCOX31VZOWJ TORLI WSO pue  e o1ddy     Jond now pontuded sr ZULMEIP SIY  0  UOISIA9I ON  L  9 68   01 2 95  01   vl Oll 0  X3 9   Il XZOX3INZOW3  WI XALV ne   SLINN NOILYOOT SnOQNVZVH mn  0 15      0    a    Y SdNOX9  Z    Ald    55912 P med  NOLV201 NOILYOOT             a       sdnoso    E             TAAL STIGOW                fant  SNOGYVZVHNON   ShoQNvzvH ONS ATIVOISNIMINI        Id    VSO 9 WI equ     11  lt  01 10    T   SINT NOILVOO1 SNOQYVZVH 31q229  19  lt  09 10 v5    3  10 25  10 0   lt  xeuig 10
60.  input signal increases position  V1 Up  Down  MG00552a  2 15    September 2012       Installation SD760       Piping recommendations   e Blow out all piping before connections are made to prevent dirt  chips  or debris from entering the positioner     e Use pipe sealant sparingly and only on male threads  A non hardening sealant is strongly recommended  Pipe  sealing tape is not recommended     e Connect the positioner to a source of clean  oil free instrument air  Failure to do so will increase the possibility  of a malfunction or deviation from specified performance  Instrument air requirements are given in the  following section     After piping the positioner  go to Section 2 5 Electrical Connections     2 4 2 Instrument Air Requirements    Instrument quality air must be supplied to the positioner  Connect the positioner to a source of clean  dry  oil free  instrument air  Failure to do so will increase the possibility of a malfunction or deviation from specified    performance   A CAUTION    Use of process fluids other than instrument air is not recommended  No claim is made as  to the suitability of this product for use with other process fluids  such as hazardous  gases  except as listed on the appropriate certificate  Non approved instruments are  suitable for use with instrument air only  Optional features and modifications such as  tapped exhaust do not imply suitability for use with hazardous gases except as listed on  the approval certificate     There are many t
61.  oejojioioioiojojiojoioioioioioeioioi op    oosooejiojoio          OD   OD   OD   OD   OD                           OD   OD   OD       OD   OD                  CO   CO   C             UD  t  t0   LO FD  t  t WO   tO  O              LO    OFO   I     V2   L2   OO LL                                       a          e ojojojoliojojoilojioiojijojijoio eio npoooo ojo  O oOo ojojojojojojojo rojoj oio O O O O Oo o ojo                                 o        lg ele               ejeje jejejejeje      NIN je     e e        e   ele      89   30   45      89     89    ER    89      89     89      89      78  EEE    89      89      89      89      89     89     89     89     89      89      89     89     89          60   89   30   45   74    60   89   30   45   74          100   62   77   81   54   63   63      Temperaturklasse                  T1 T1 T1 T1    Umgebungstemperatur in   C bei Einsatz in        eo SIS                                    ejiojojoioejojiojoeiojoeloioj oijelo  joo o joodoc jo jojojiojojo  3  N O o oj o o o oOjO O O O O O  O O O O O O  O  OrjO O  O O  D ejej ejej ejeje ej ejeje             een     e                      09               2   00   09   9   00   09   09   09   09 109 100        OD   09   OD   OO   OO 100   CO  I                    oo   CO   09  00          CO           OO        OO   OO   OO   CO   CO  CO         CO  OO  00   OO   CO       DF OD              OD               OD   OD   OD                OD                             OD             
62.  of the European Parliament and of the Council of 12 December 2006 on the  harmonization of the laws of Member States relating to electrical equipment designed for use  within certain voltage limits   Richtlinie des Europ  ischen Parlaments des Rates zur Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften der  Mitgliedstaaten betreffend elektrische Betriebsmittel zur Verwendung innerhalb bestimmter  Spannungsgrenzen     94 9 EC Directive of the European Parliament and the Council on the approximation of the laws of the  Member States concerning equipment and protective systems intended for use in potentially  explosive atmospheres   Richtlinie des Europ  ischen Parlaments und des Rates zur Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften  der Mitgliedstaaten f  r Ger  te und Schutzsysteme zur bestimmungsgem    en Verwendung in  explosionsgef  hrdeten Bereichen     Spring House  04 November 2009       Siemens Industry  Inc     Sweeney  Approvals Coordinator Anderson  Manager  PIBU    Name  function   siglatur           function signatur  Name  Funktion Unterschrift           Funktion Unterschrift    Annex A is integral part of this declaration   Anhang A ist integraler Bestandteil dieser Erkl  rung   This declaration certifies the conformity to the specified directives but contains no assurance of properties   The safety documentation accompanying the product shall be considered in detail   Diese Erkl  rung bescheinigt die   bereinstimmung mit den genannten Richtlinien  ist jedoch keine Zusicherung von Eige
63.  potentiometer labeled SPAN     10  Rotate the input shaft back to the 4 mA position and verify that the zero position output has not changed   Adjust as necessary with the ZERO potentiometer     11  Disconnect calibration equipment    Wiring  4 20 mAdc Board   Connect a user supplied DC loop power supply and load to terminal block TB1 on the PC board as shown in Figure  4 4  The terminals labeled V1 and V2 are used for the 4 20 mA loop  V3 is not used  Polarity is not important   Recommended wiring is twisted shielded pairs  22 AWG  0 38 mm   or larger     The power supply must furnish 10 36 Vdc at the required load current  See Figure 4 7 for a maximum loop load  based on supply voltage     Refer to Control Drawing 15032 7602 for installation in a hazardous location        September 2012 4 7    Option Kit Installation SD760          1200 ohm           RE      eene RI REES OO D  IINE                      ai on T      III IT tt    10 VDC Loop Supply Voltage 36 VDC          Figure 4 7 Maximum Loop Load vs  Loop Supply Voltage    4 1 2 4 1K O Potentiometer Feedback Option    The potentiometer is a continuous turn potentiometer without end stops so it will not be damaged by rotating it past  the end of its range  Calibration and wiring connections are to         see Figure 4 4B  The potentiometer is rated at 1  Watt  Do not exceed 32 mA or 32V     Calibration  1K O Board    An ohmmeter and the equipment listed in Section 3 1 are needed for calibration   1  Apply supply air press
64.  power to the proximity switches and external circuitry so switching action can  be observed     2  Apply supply air pressure to the positioner and set valve and actuator to the first desired switch position        September 2012 4 5    Option Kit Installation SD760       3     Squeeze the tabs on one of the cams and rotate it in the direction of positioner input shaft rotation with  increasing input signal until the switch triggers     Set valve and actuator at the second desired switch position   Squeeze the tabs on the second cam  and rotate it in the direction of input shaft rotation until the switch triggers     Exercise the valve and check switch operation  Disconnect calibration equipment     4 1 2 3 4 20 mAdc Current Feedback Board Option    Refer to Figure 4 4 for a wiring schematic and terminal identification          4 20 mA     Power Supply         pier E  10 36 Vdc                        Terminals  V1 and V2  R Load   See Figure 4 7  A  Schematic B  TB1 Terminals    Figure 4 4 Typical 4 20 mA Feedback Option Loop with Load    Calibration  4 20 mAdc Board    The equipment needed for calibration is listed in Section 3 1     3     Apply supply air pressure and set actuator and valve to 50      5      Loosen  but do not remove  the potentiometer bracket screws  Swing the potentiometer away from the upper  cam index gear  Rotate the potentiometer gear until the red alignment mark is aligned with the centerline of the  input shaft   The potentiometer is a continuous tu
65.  protection Intrinsic  Safety EEx ia IIC IIB     The relationship between type of the connected circuit  maximum permissible ambient temperature for    application as category 1 resp  category 2 equipment and temperature class as well as the effective  internal reactances for the individual types of cuboidal inductive sensors  is shown in the following    tables                            Sheet 2 6    ged    EC type examination Certificates without signature and official stamp shall not be valid  The certificates may be circulated  only without alteration  Extracts or alterations are subject to approval by the Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt   In case of dispute  the German text shall prevail     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt    Bundesallee 100   38116 Braunschweig  Germany       Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt    Braunschweig und Berlin  4  SUPPLEMENT TO EC TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X    maximum permissible ambient temperature in   C for application in  temperature class       T1    59   71   99   56   68   96     FJ 7 N   1 1  65  220  59   71   99   56   68   96   45    68   96 61   89   28  68   96   49   61   89   28  NCN2 F56 N1    69   97 65   93   37  NBN3 F69 NO     NBN4 V3 NO    56   68   96   49   61   89   28  NBN4 V3 NO  eo          24    Y189289    NCNA V3 NO    96   49   61   89  61   89   28      49    NCB15 U    NO    96   49  NCN15 M    NO    96  49  49                                                          NCB20 L2 
66.  the  feedback linkage    IMPORTANT    Check that all adapters couplers are fully inserted  If the NAMUR adapter or shaft end  includes an anti backlash spring  the adapter must be fully inserted in the mating slot for  the anti backlash spring to function        2 12 September 2012    SD760 Installation       1  Design Level D       _          S         ee                        D     S     bracket      pr    typical     k    t   forall3    e  posa 1                  7   methods            i Integral Namur         nn                Namur coupler     shaft  factory      ceu   TGX 16300 1556     installed    ih Ee      Occ   6DR40048D fo    A secondary  coupler may be required in addition to those shown above   Some examples are shown below  shaded            H     x         H                0568      Actuator    Figure 2 14 Rotary Actuator  Basic Feedback Methods       September 2012 2 13    Installation SD760       2 4 PNEUMATIC CONNECTIONS    This section identifies the pneumatic connections between  1  the positioner and actuator   2  the positioner and a  source of instrument quality air and  3  the positioner  Model 760P  and the pneumatic control or input signal  source  Connections are listed in Table 2 1 and shown in Figures 2 1 and 2 2  Piping is discussed in Section 2 4 1  and instrument air requirements are presented in Section 2 4 2  As required  the exhaust can be piped away from the  positioner     Refer to Table 2 2 and the actuator manufacturer   s literature 
67.  with output option s  that is installed in a    hazardous area  energy limiting barriers installed in a non hazardous location  and interconnecting shielded twisted   pair wiring     2 5 2 1 FM and CSA Hazardous Location Precautions    This section provides FM CSA hazardous location precautions that should be observed by the user when installing  or servicing the equipment described in this manual     Precautions   English    For Division 1 hazardous locations        Ad              Substitution of components may impair intrinsic safety     For Division 2 hazardous locations          Explosion Hazard   Substitution of components        impair intrinsic suitability for  Class I  Division 2                          When the equipment described in this manual is installed without safety barriers  switch off applied power at its  source  in non hazardous location  before connecting or disconnecting power  signal or other wiring     Pr  cautions   Francais  Emplacements dangereux de Division 1  AVERTISSEMENT    LA SUBSTITUTION DE COMPOSANTS PEUT COMPROMETTRE LA S  CURIT    INTRINSEQUE    Emplacements dangereux de Division 2  AVERTISSEMENT  RISQUE D   EXPLOSION   LA SUBSTITUTION DE COMPOSANTS PEUT RENDRE  CE MATERIEL INACCEPTABLE POUR LES EMPLACEMENTS DE CLASSE I   DIVISION 2  Lorsque l appareil d  crit dans la notice ci jointe est install   sans barri  res de s  curit    on doit couper l alimentation      lectrique a la source  hors de l emplacement dangereux  avant d effectuer l
68. 0   69   84   100   SI   66   so   39   54     NJ 5 18GM N        70   so   76   91   100   73   88   100   62   77   s     54   63     NJ 6 22 N     130  100   73   88   100   69   s4   100   s    66   so   39   54     NJ 8 18GK N        70   so   73   88   100   69   84   100   SI   66   so   39   54     NJ 8 18GM N          70   so   76   91   100   73   88   100   62   77        54   63     NJ 10 22 N    130  100   73   88   100   69   s4   100   s    66   so   39   54     NJ 10 30GK    N          140   100   73   88   100   69   84   100   SI   66   so   39   54     NJ10 30GM N    140  100   76   91   100   73   88   100   62   77   s     54   63     NJ15 30GK   N    140  100   73   88   100   69   84   100   SI   66   so  39   54        100   Fere s       39     52mA    169 mW           4    Ui 16 V  nae      242 mW    67  61  63  61  63  61  63  61  63  61  63  61  63  42  42  42  42  42  42  42  63  74  63  61  63  63  63  61  61  42  74  57  63  61  63  61  61  63  61  61  63  61          Dieses Dokument enth  lt sicherheitsrelevante Angaben  Es darf nicht ohne Absprache mit dem Normenfachmann ge  ndert werden        This document contains safety relevant information  It must not be altered without the authorization of the norm expert                          Confidential according to ISO 16016 Only valid as long as released in EDM or with a valid production documentation  Scale  1 1 date  2010 jun 03  Control Drawing h ti respons    US DRL  FAPEPPERL FUCHS          
69. 0  66   81   100  4560  89  30  45   74     NCNS5O FP NO     220 360  73   88   100   66   81  100   45   60   89  30  45   74    INJO8 F N     30  50  73 88  100          82   100  45  60  78  30  45  57    NJ 1 5 F N    100  67  82   100  45 60  78  30 45  57    NJ 2 5 F N    50 88   100 100 30 74  NJ 2 F1 N    30   45   74  2 V3 N    30   45   74          3 V3 N     NJ 4 F N     NJ 6 F N  NJ 10 F N     NJ 15 U  N     NJ 15 M1  N     NJ 20 0         NJ 30 U  N     NJ 30P U  1N     NJ 40            NJ 50 FP N            45 74  45 14                                                    Tabelle 2  Einsatz als Kategorie 2 Gerat    Seite 4 7    een    EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigungen ohne Unterschrift und ohne Siegel haben keine G  ltigkeit   Diese EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung darf nur unver  ndert weiterverbreitet werden   Ausz  ge oder Anderungen bed  rfen der Genehmigung der Physikalisch Technischen Bundesanstalt     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt e Bundesallee 100     D 38116 Braunschweig    Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt       Braunschweig und Berlin  5  Erg  nzung zur EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X    Besondere Bedingungen    1     Beim Einsatz der quaderf  rmigen induktiven Sensoren Typen FJ     NJ     NB    und NC    im  Temperaturbereich von  60   C bis  20   C sind diese durch Einbau in ein zus  tzliches Gehause  vor Schlageinwirkung zu sch  tzen     Die Anschlussteile der quaderf  rmigen induktiven Sensoren Typen FJ     NJ     NB    un
70. 0 0 58 w          re     sisi s   gt   Mio Eg LOT 1  LO   tO   tO  t 1O  O         PE Eg CN  CN          N  NIN ala e  ex   e  ex  E og d  own Dose 5  cnl            i is TORE       13 SS                 5    2    Oo    olo       t  LO PLO    i     e  E      6    maximum BI a  HESE in   C for application     9       130 EI  320   360   56   68    En                                  N  Oo       ao  zb                      Sli  ele  jo    ch     xol Of               11   Z ZiZjolz o oh Shock ee      5151521182121 1212112 21512       fob       WE  4   Zi amp elo           x XXL BEIS EA la  zz iz iziziz            e     99 662 2  2 2 9 2 Z 3 2 el EE el uu ju           ijua  gt            gt   gt         0  gt   Oe rj                2              Zizili                                         gt   S fur fu   Els FS          eR  ININ                                  ae ololi  leleoioioilo  EE EE EE EE              1 1  2121515 121212 121212121212 151515151255 lala 1212121221212  12 1212121222122             1 equipment    Table 1  Application as category     Sheet 3 7    areis ne RR en no          ememr                EC type examination Certificates without signature and official stamp shall not be valid  The certificates may be circulated    alterations are subject to approval by the Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt     In case of dispute  the German text shall prevail   Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt    Bundesallee 100     38116 Braunschweig     GERMANY    only with
71. 0 N                   a  CH  GX       o  M  Co  CO             e                                       NCB2 Fi NO     90 100  73   88   100   66          100   45          89  30  45   74    INCB2 V3 NO   _  100 100  73   88   100        81  100   45   60   89  30  45   74     NCN2 F56 N1   _  100 100  75   so   100  70  85   100  55  701 87             100 100  72   87   100  65   so   100  41 56  63  24137   37    INBN4 V3 NO        100 100  73   88   100  66  81  100  45   60   89   30  45  74     NBNA V3 N0 Y189289  120   100  72   87   100  65   so   100   41   56  63  24 37   37    110  200  73   88   100   66  81  100   45  60         30 45  74     NBB20 UK NO     110 200  73   88   100  66          100  45 60  89  30 45  74    100  66   81   100  45  60  8 amp 9  30 45  74    300 100   66   81   100  45   eo   89  30 45   NCN4 V3 NO     100 100  73   88   100  66  81  100  45   60   89  30 45  74    INCB15 U    NO        110 160  73   88   100  66  81  100  45 60  89  30 45   74    INCN15 M   NO    100 100  73   88   100  66  81  100  45  60   89   30 45  74    INCB2022 NO   X  110 200  73   88   100  66   81  100  45  60  89   30 45  74    INCN20 U   NO     110 160  73   88   100   66  81  100  45  60  89  30 45  74     NCN30 U   4NO     110  160 100  66  81  100  45 60  89  30145   74    ENCB4oFP NO   220 360               100  6  81   100  49  eo            74   NCN40 U   NO     120 130  73   88   100   66   81   100   45   60  89   30 45  74  105 300  73   88   10
72. 00 694  Input Shaft with 0 25    to 2    Feedback Lever 16300 695  Input Shaft with 0 25    to 4    Feedback Lever 16300 696  Input Shaft with 3    to 6    Feedback Lever 16300 697       Universal Input Shaft Kit  Design Level D  Figures 2 3 and 2 13     TGX 16300 1587       NAMUR Adapter  Design Level D    TGX 16300 1556       Square Adapter  Design Level D    TGX 16300 1545       Linear Adapter  Design Level D    TGX 16300 1557       Feedback Lever Kit  2    Design Level D    TGX 16152 712       Feedback Lever Kit  4    Design Level D    TGX 16152 714          Feedback Lever Kit  6    Design Level D          TGX 16152 716       1 4    CUSTOMER PRODUCT SUPPORT    Support is available through an online Support Request service  a link is provided in the table at the end of this  section     When contacting Siemens for support     Please provide complete product information     e This information is provided on the product nameplate  part number or model number  serial number     and or version      If there is a problem with product operation     e 15 the problem intermittent or repeatable  What symptoms have been observed     e What steps  configuration changes  loop modifications  etc  were performed before the problem    occurred     e What troubleshooting steps have been performed        15 the installation environment  e g  temperature  humidity  within the product s specified operating  parameters  For software  does the PC meet or exceed the minimum requirements  e g  p
73. 1 2 Emission  EN61000 6 1 and EN61000 6 2 Immunity  ATEX                                      112 G EEx ia 11C T4 T5 T6    113 G EEx nL IIC T5   See ATEX Certifications for service restrictions   SIRA 03ATEX2577X and SIRA 03ATEX4578  Enclosure    isse dr Type 4X  in accordance with NEMA standard 250   Type IP65 in accordance with IEC standard 529    Table 1 1 Positioner Specifications with an Installed Output Option Kit    Note  All percentages are based on full span of output  unless otherwise noted     Parameter    Option   4 20 mA Feedback Board 1K Q Potentiometer Feedback Board    Temperature Range   760P  85 C   40   to  185  F   85 C   40  to  185  F    75 C   40   to  167  F   75 C   40   to  167  F     760E  Configuration 4 20 mA DC output  direct or reverse Resistive output  direct or reverse acting  acting    Linearity  Hysteresis  Deadband  Repeatability    Supply voltage effect Less than 0 01  for 5V change in  supply    Ambient temperature effect   Less than 1 0  per 28  C  50  F  change   Less than 1 0  per 28  C  50  F  change  Zero   Span 55   to 150   input range for full span 0 to 915 Ohms over 90   input rotation  10 to 36 Vde  ECC oan RECHNEN NES                 Power Rating 1 Watt   70  C  158 F   Do not exceed 32 mA or 32 Volts    Parameter  Option   Mechanical Limit Switch Board Proximity Sensor Limit Switch Board    Temperature Range   760P  85 C   40   to  185  F   85 C   4   to  185  F   760E  75  C   40   to  167  F   75 C   4   to  167  F     resol
74. 1s for  rotary  For either action  mounting considerations and a typical procedure are provided     Before beginning an installation  the positioner to actuator mounting and feedback linkage must be carefully  considered  A positioner mounting bracket kit with mechanical feedback components can be ordered from Siemens   Each mounting bracket kit is designed for a specific actuator or series of actuators and includes the bracket   hardware  and other parts  If a kit 1s not available for a particular actuator or actuator model  a custom mounting  bracket and feedback linkage can be ordered from Siemens or fabricated on site     Positioner dimensions and mounting hole locations are shown in Figure 2 1  for design levels A and B  and in  Figure 2 2  for design level D  Figures 2 2 and 2 3 provide dimension details for design level D adapters and  feedback levers     For actuator dimensions and mounting details  refer to the actuator manufacturer s literature     CAUTION    Exceeding the positioner or actuator specified operating temperature limits can  adversely affect performance and safety and may cause damage to the instrument   Refer to Section 1 1 Specification for positioner environmental specifications        2 2 September 2012    SD760 Installation       RISING STEM APPLICATION ROTARY APPLICATION    7 840   199 14                     Legenden  meer e  ide _  FOR ROTARY  APPLICATIONS 0 59    14 73   RIGHT VIEW    ROTARY APPLICATION                      M6X1       1 968  FE
75. 20 Clarification of the requirements for plugs and  sockets  21 Altered acceptance criteria for luminaire starter  and ignition tests  27 3 Different preparation of enclosed break  components prior to testing                                      No electric motors                    Plugs and sockets are mechanically  secured  No Luminaires           sape eg Product is certified as limited energy         ES  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA          Spring House  4 November 2009    Siemens Industry  Inc     John Sweeney  Approvals Coordinator    Anhang A ist integraler Bestandteil dieser Erkl  rung   Annex A   s integral part of this declaration Diese Erkl  rung bescheinigt die   bereinstimmung mit den genannten Richtlinien  ist jedoch keine Zusicherung von  Eigenschaften    Die Sicherheitshinweise der mitgelieferten Produktdokumentation sind zu beachten    This declaration certifies the conformity to the specified directives but contains no assurance of properties  The safety documentation accompanying the product shall be considered in    detail   Page 6 6               nu BW N e    10    11    12    sira    CERTIFICATION    EC TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE    Equipment intended for use in Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Directive 94 9 EC    Certificate Number  Sira 03ATEX2577X Isue  1  Equipment  Series 760 Valve Controllers   Applicant  Siemens Energy and Automation Inc   Address  1201 Sumneytown Pike    Spring House  PA19477 0900  USA    This equipment and any acceptable variatio
76. 5   so   100   70   85   100   55   70   90                NA  RJ21 Na   30   25   75   90   100   70   85   100   55   70   90               NA  RJ21 Bia   70   50   75   90   100   70   85   100   55   70   90               NA  RJ43 Na   40   50   75   so   100   70   85   100   55   70   90  walwal NA                TABLE 11     INDUCTIVE SLOT SENSORS          Typ 1 Typ 2 Typ 3 Typ 4  01  16   01   16   01   16   01  16    bigis a  li   52 mA   76 mA     34 mW   64 mW   169 mW   242 mW  Model ren  SC2 N0a a        Oc                        46  SC3 5a N0a  150   150   56   68   96   49   61   89   28   40   68   13   25   53  SC3 5 N0 Ya  150   150   55   67   95   48   oo   88   23 135   63   6   18   46  SJ1 8 N Ya   30   100   73   88   100   67   82   100   45   60   78   30   45   57  SJ2 Na   30   100   56   68   96   49   61   89   28   40   6s   13   25   53  SJ2 SNa   30   100   73   88   100   66   81   100   45   60   78   30   45   57  SJ2 S1Na   30   100   73   88   100   66   81   100   45   60   78          45   57  SJ2 2 Na   30   100   73   88   100   67   82   100   45   60   78   30   45   57  SJ3 5 a Na   50   250   56   68   96   49   o1   89   28   40   68   13   25   53  SJ3 5 H a   so   250   73   88   100   66   81   100   45   60   89  30   45   74  SJ3 5 SNa   30   100   73   88   100   66   81   100   45   60   89   30   45   74  SJ3 5 SINa   30   100   73   88   100   66   81   100   45   60   89   30   45   74  SJ5 a Na   50   250   56   68   9
77. 6   49   61   89   28   40   68   13  25   53  SJ5 Ka   50   550   55   67   95   48   oo   88   25  37  65   9  21  a  SJ10 Na   so   100   55   67   95   48   oo   ss   25   37   65   9   21   49  SJ15 Na   150   1200   55   67   95   48   oo   88   25   37  65   9   21   a  SJ30 Na   150   1250   55   67   95   48   60   ss   25  37   65   9   21   a          Dieses Dokument enth  lt sicherheitsrelevante Angaben  Es darf nicht ohne Absprache mit dem Normenfachmann ge  ndert werden        This document contains safety relevant information  It must not be altered without the authorization of the norm expert                          Confidential according to ISO 16016 Only valid as long as released in EDM or with a valid production documentation  Scale  1 1 date  2010 jun 03  Control Drawing h ti respons    US DRL  FAPEPPERL FUCHS NAMUR SENSORS   FM   er  weed  uswa  116 0165F  Twinsburg l norm US GAP sheet 7 of 8                                  TABLE 12   INDUCTIVE SENSORS  Model Vmax  V    Imax  mA  Pi Ci  uF    Li  mH    mW      Ui   li     Wmesewawrwrew         m    gt      3            Dieses Dokument enth  lt sicherheitsrelevante Angaben  Es darf nicht ohne Absprache mit dem Normenfachmann ge  ndert werden                                      This document contains safety relevant information  It must not be altered without the authorization of the norm expert   Confidential according to ISO 16016 Only valid as long as released in EDM or with a valid production documen
78. 7  72   72   46   51   51  32  37   37        10   46              45   0  73 78   78   67  72  72  46   51      32   37   37  CJ1 12GK N a   60   o  73          100   66   s     100   45   60   89   30   45   74  CJ2 18GK N a   60   o  73   ss   100   66   s     100   45   60   89   30   45   74  CJ4 12GK N a   60   o   73   8   100   66   81   100   45   co   89   30   45   74  CJ6 18GK N a   60   o  73   ss   100   66   s     100   45   60   89   30   as   74  CJ15 40 N a  140   0  74   89   100   69   84   100   53   68   so   42   57   61  CJ40 FP N a 145   o   74   89   100   69   84   100   53   68   so   42   57         TABLE 2     INDUCTIVE SENSORS  FJ                           1        2        3        4  01  16   01   16 V 01   16   01  16      25 mA Ii   25 mA Ii   52 mA Ii   76 mA         34 mW Pi   64 mW Pi   169 mW        242 mW    Li  FJ6 110 Na Hs      In  88   100 I 73                    63   63  FJ7 Na 220 100 100 63 63          TABLE 3   MAGNETIC SENSORS  Model Vmax  V    Imax        Pi Ci  nF    Li  uH    Ui   li   mW   mormon       e   m        w        mormon    e f o   m   9                Eere E   es sre BE BE       Dieses Dokument enth  lt sicherheitsrelevante Angaben  Es darf nicht ohne Absprache mit dem Normenfachmann ge  ndert werden        This document contains safety relevant information  It must not be altered without the authorization of the norm expert        Confidential according to ISO 16016 Only valid as long as released in EDM or with 
79. 760  NA    Alternate method of rating resistors when used to Not applicable to 760  limit capacitive discharge                               Anhang A ist integraler Bestandteil dieser Erkl  rung   Annex A is integral part of this declaration Diese Erkl  rung bescheinigt die   bereinstimmung mit den genannten Richtlinien  ist jedoch keine Zusicherung von  Eigenschaften    Die Sicherheitshinweise der mitgelieferten Produktdokumentation sind zu beachten    This declaration certifies the conformity to the specified directives but contains no assurance of properties  The safety documentation accompanying the product shall be considered in    detail   Page 5 6                      SIEMENS    Anhang EG Konformitatserklarung  EC Declaration of Conformity    No  A5E00362252           I  3 G Sira OGATEX4578 Ex nA    T6                    Certificate No   Sira  Chester UK   Sira O3ATEX4578 issue 1    Certification  EEx nL IIC T5                Principal difference between EN 50021 1999 and EN 60079 15 2005    6 2 Doubling of impact test levels from 3 5 to 7 J  were tested by FM to 4 0 and 7 0 Joules   7 Doubling of environmental exposure from two  60079 0 2006    weeks to four weeks for non metallic enclosures   7 4 Requirements for threads in non metallic There are no threads in non metallic  enclosures enclosures  17 Firming of risk assessment and test requirements No large electric motors  for large electric motors  17 Tighter requirements for motors fed from  frequency converters   
80. 760 Valve Controller is equipped with Proximity Switch  2  option  refer to the sheet 12 of 13 of this control drawing     7  If 760 Valve Controller is equipped with I P option  refer to the  sheet 13 of 13 of this control drawing     Certification Agency Controlled Document  No Changes Allowed Without Reference to the    Appropriate Certifying Agency    General Intrinsically Safe Installation Notes    1  Shielded Cable is required and the shield shall be connected as shown  The unterminated end of the shield shall be  insulated   The series 760 Valve Controller shall not be connected to  under normal or abnormal conditions  a source of supply  that exceeds 250 Vrms or 250 Vdc with respect to earth ground   The user is responsible for compatibility and approval of the user provided associated apparatus   Entity installation requirements  where applicable   Vmax  gt  Voc  Imax  gt          Ca  gt  Ci   Ccable  La   Li   Lcable   Installation must be in accordance with applicable electrical codes  refer to ISA RP12 6 for guidance   Caution  use cables suitable for 5  C above surrounding ambient   These instructions are provided for conformance with FM and CSA Certifications only     Notes for Installation in Division 2 Locations    1  Limit switches and potentiometers must be installed as intrinsically safe  with barriers   See sheets 8 to 11 for limit  switches or sheets 4 to 7 for potentiometer installation notes   2  Caution  use cables suitable for 5  C above surrounding a
81. A  8V maximum  0 15A maximum  FM Division 2 Current 4 20 mA    I P Module Ambient Temperature Range  See Sheet 2 of 13     Details Approved Title    J  Sweeney Control Drawing for    J  Sweeney  J  Sweeney Series 760 Valve Controller    19 May 08   Minor correction pg 13   J  Sweeney    22 June 11 Correct pg 12  add SII J  Sweeney  Siemens Industry  Inc   Spring House PA  USA 19477 15032 7602  Sheet 13 of 13    Drawing No        SIEMENS    EC Declaration of Conformity  EG Konformitatserklarung    No    5  00362252  03    Manufacturer  Siemens Industry  Inc   Hersteller    Address  1201 Sumneytown Pike  Anschrift  Spring House  PA 19446 USA    Product description  Valve Positioner   Produktbezeichnung Model 760  Type   Typ 76abcdefghijkBl with a b c d e f g h i j k  Type   Typ 76abcdefghijkD  with a b c d e f g h i j k       The product described above in the form as delivered is in conformity with the provisions of the  following European Directives    Das bezeichnete Produkt stimmt in der von uns in Verkehr gebrachten Ausf  hrung mit den  Vorschriften folgender Europ  ischer Richtlinien   berein     89 336 EEC Council Directive on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to  electromagnetic compatibility  amended by 91 263 EEC  92 31 EEC and 93 68 EEC   Richtlinie des Rates zur Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften der Mitgliedstaaten   ber die  elektromagnetische Vertr  glichkeit   ge  ndert durch 91 263 EWG  92 31 EWG und 93 68 EWG      2006 95 EG Directive
82. Approved Title  19 Feb  98 As FM Approved J  Sweeney Control Drawing for  20 April 98 J  Sweeney    14June 07   ControlAir I P Added   J  Sweeney Series 760 Valve Controller  19 May 08   Minor correction pg 13   J  Sweeney    22 June 11 Correct pg 12  add SII J  Sweeney  p Drawing No   Siemens Industry  Inc  on    Spring House PA  USA 19477 15032 7602 Sheet 4 of 13       Potentiometer Intrinsically Safe and Division 2 Installation   Grounded Circuit Dual  Channel Barrier    Hazardous Area   see sheet 1 for details     Safe Area    Voltage  Measuring  Circuit          Barrier must be CSA Certified and FM Approved dual channel grounded Shunt Diode Zener  Barrier with output safety parameters  as follows     Voc Channel     Channel 2  lt  10V  Voc Channel 1   earth     10V   Voc Channel 2   earth     10V  Isc Channel 1 or Channel 2 x 0 2A     CSA Certified and FM Approved MTL760 Dual Channel  star connected Barrier  is  recommended       Connections to the terminals TB1 V1 and TB1 V3 may be swapped       Potentiometer Cable Parameters for Intrinsic Safety   Grounded Circuit Dual Channel Barrier        Maximum Values  Capacitance Inductance L R Ratio  A amp B 0 30 uF 110 uH 35 uH per Ohm  C amp E 0 90 uF 440 uH 140 uH per Ohm  D F amp G 2 40 uF 880 uH 280 uH per Ohm       Gas Groups                                 Ambient Temperature Range  See Sheet 2 of 13     Details Approved Title    J  Sweeney Control Drawing for    J  Sweeney e  J  Sweeney Series 760 Valve Controller    19 
83. CED IN ITS ENTIRETY AND WITHOUT CHANGE    FM Approvals Ltd  1 Windsor Dials  Windsor  Berkshire  UK  SL4 1RS  T   44  0  1753 750 000 F   44  0  1753 868 700 E mail  atex fmapprovals com www fmglobal com       FM F ATEX 020  Feb 07  Page 1 of 4    SCHEDULE  lt         Meses A Ar FAM hate  Corsa    to               Examination Certificate       FMO7ATEX0002X    13 Description of Equipment or Protective System     The T590 is an electro mechanical current to pressure converter  The unit s electronics operates on    a4to 20  however    mA current loop  The ambient operating temperature range of the T590 is  55 C to 85 C   the temperature class and the maximum permitted operating temperature are dependent    on the Energy Limitation Parameters specified below  The circuitry for the T590 is contained on a    single pri    nted circuit board that is mounted to the transducer s drive coil on the aluminium manifold    and covered with a plastic cover  The I P Converter is intended to be installed within an additional  enclosure            T4     sc   100mA 30V _3 0W    Ec                       42 mA 28V _3 36W  LR CC OPC      150mA      25      TG        3  sse   60mA  38 8V    T590 AabK  I P Converter    11G ExiallC T  Ta    55  C to Ta max  a 7 Output Pressure  C  D  E   b   Connection  M  P    Energy Limitation Parameters                         2 328W    14 Special Conditions for Safe Use     f     2    3     15 Essentia    The non metallic cover of the I P converter is considere
84. E  ra e  Item Part Number  987     A ES  985 NAMUR Adapter TGX 16300 1556        674    545 Square Adapter     TGX 16300 1545       Y N Linear Adapter TGX 16300 1557 9  Lever Kit  2  TGX 16152 712 z  NAMUR SQUARE LINEAR Lever Kit  4  TGX 16152 714  ADAPTER ADAPTER ADAPTER Lever Kit  6  TGX 16152 716    SNAP RING    WASHER    ofl Eo  A 917  777 a  490          T            SR  EE GE         _   NOTES N gi E    Dimensions are in  inches   O RING 760  Lever orientation BODY  applies only when  installed on Model  760   The terms feedback  lever and feedback  arm are  interchangeable   r             ASSEMBLED ASSEMBLED ASSEMBLED      NAMUR SHAFT SQUARE SHAFT LINEAR SHAFT                SHAFT      Figure 2 3 Shaft Adapter Options and Feedback Lever Installation  Design Level D       September 2012    Installation SD760       2 3 1 Linear Actuator Applications    Figure 2 4 shows the positioner mounted on a typical linear actuator  The bracket and mounting hardware are  provided in an optional Siemens bracket kit  Bracket design will vary with actuator manufacturer and model   Actuator shaft position is fed to the positioner through a feedback linkage  As shown in the figure  the stem bracket  is fixed to the actuator shaft and the feedback pin is secured to the stem bracket  A feedback lever is fixed to the  linear adapter  which is fastened to the positioner input shaft  The feedback pin rides in the slot in the feedback  lever  As the actuator stem rises and falls  the linear mo
85. EDBACK LEVER 4 HOLES  50 00   INPUT SHAFT FOR 310P   BOLT CIRCLE  LINEAR APPLICATIONS   LEVER SLOT FOR BACK VIEW  1 4  DIA  FEEDBACK DIMENSIONS IN INCHES  MM  daa FOR ROTARY  PIN   3 4 NPT OR M25 ELECTRICAL  CONDUIT CONNECTION RIGHT VIEW      Ra  of  So  SE  Q  I0   gt       Figure 2 1 Installation Dimensions  Design Levels A and          September 2012 2 3                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         Installation SD760      VALVE 2    aA        330     SUPPLY     8 38     FEEDBACK     VALVE 1    LEVERS VANPT    SLOT FOR  TYPICAL     5 16  DIA  INDICATOR l  FEEDBACK     EXHAUST    PIN  INPUT         760P 4      i     8 910 zl 2      226 3    SUPPLY PORT  2 409 BEACON                Indicator         61 19  4 INDICATOR   AT    Y    not available    768  Y      with linear  19 51  1 088  k   feedback lever  er  27 64   on B d    LINEAR ADAPTER  amp  LEVER  3 855   s Loo   97 92         
86. EU Seed 3 4  3 6 Retaining Clip Position  Design Levels A and B A 3 6  3 7 Retaining Clip Position  Design Level D  3 6  3 8 Calibration Adjustments    uoce eee EEN RENTE RR EU e DS ERE aie 3 7  4 1 Output Option Boards        ran in Ian RO I BIER EE VUE arme 4 2  4 2 PC Board Installation and Mechanical Limit Switch Components                 essere 4 3  4 3  TB2 Tetminals u    er pte thi rotes ci eite ia ie ede ec Bede taedet 4 5  4 4 Typical 4 20 mA Feedback Option Loop with Load                    esses enne 4 6  4 5 Potentiometer Alignment   2 eee                                            4 6  4 6 4 20 mA Loop                                                                     4 7  4 7 Maximum Loop Load vs  Loop Supply Voltage                  sess nns 4 8  4 8      Q Feedback Potentiometer Schematic                  eese ener            ener ener nnne 4 8  4 9  Beacon Indicator    2 2 one iom neu tee pete ee ee I Ree e OH T eU o E HER a PO HEC a a ede 4 9  RE Nee 4 10  4 11 UP Installation  Exploded View                   sese eene E O      4 11  4 12  Output Capacity Spool  Kit    e adea ee petet aan art RE Ban Ran Alster 4 12  4 13 Model 760 Positioner with Optional Model 750 Adapter Plate 4 14  5 1 Feedback Lever for 1 4 Inch Feedback Pin  Design Levels A and B    5 2  5 2 Feedback Lever for 5 16 Inch Feedback Pin  Design Level D  5 2  LIST OF TABLES  TABLE PAGE  1 1 Positioner Specifications with an Installed Output Option Kr    1 3  1 2  Model Designation  Eed aot
87. ION  Issue 0  Number Sheet Rev  Date Description  15032 7612 1of6 1 10 Feb 04 General view  standard case  15032 7612 20f6 1 10 Feb 04 I P converter  15032 7612 3 of 6 1 10 Feb 04   Option PCB parts  15032 7612 4 of 6 1 10 Feb 04 Option PCB layout  15032 7612 5 of 6 1 10 Feb 04 Option board schematics  15032 7612 6 of 6 1 10 Feb 04 Pneumatic and mechanical schematic  5 1030 Loft 2 10 Apr 04 Label  general  Issue 1  Number Sheet Rev  Date Description    Sira stamp   15032 7612 1 of 7 6 03 Oct 07 General view  standard case  15032 7612 2 of 7 6 03 Oct 07 I P Converter  15032 7612 3 of 7 6 03 Oct 07 Option PCB parts  15032 7612 4 of 7 6 03 Oct 07 Option PCB layout  15032 7612 5 of 7 6 03 Oct 07 Option board schematics  15032 7612 6 of 7 6 03 Oct 07 Pneumatic and mechanical schematic  15032 7612 7 of 7 6 03 Oct 07 Miscellaneous notes    This certificate and its schedules may only be  reproduced in its entirety and without change     Form 9400 Issue 1    Page 1 of 1    Sira Certification Service    Rake Lane  Eccleston  Chester  CH4 9JN  England    Tel   44  0  1244 670900  Fax   44  0  1244 681330  Email  info siracertification com    Web  www siracertification com    sira    CERTIFICATION    1 TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE   2 Equipment intended for use in Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Directive 94 9 EC   3 Certificate Number  Sira 03ATEX4578 Issue  1   4 Equipment  Series 760 Valve Controllers   5 Applicant  Siemens Energy and Automation Inc    6 Address  1201 Sumneytown Pik
88. IONS TYPE PART NUMBER  A x B  mm  inches   80 x 20   3 150 x 0 787  Rotary 16152 105  80 x 20     3 150 x 0 787  Rotary  Watertight  15822 550  80 x 30  NAMUR Mounting Kits  3 150 x 1 181  Bap BR  130 x 30   5 118 x 1 181  Rotary 16300 149  130 x 50   5 118 x 1 968  Rotary 16300 151        Linear 16300 516  Model 750 to Model 760 Adapter Plate  e 16300 79  O        2   o Qi     x  i         SR            Ser  50 1 968 Bolt Circle  Positioner 4 Holes  6 5 0 256 Dia   Mounting Bracket  760 Mounting Holes   A  25   0 984       5     B    SS VPN  Actuator Sa o Dimensions in mm inches  and Surface Bracket shape may vary  o  lt p  O O    20  1 181  Ooo    Xp           gt    September 2012 1 7          Introduction    SD760       Table 1 5 Cam  Input Shaft  Indicator  Output  and Other Kits                                                                                                                                                                   Description Order Number   Conversions  I P Module Kit  converts 760P to 760E  16300 1355  Sealing Plate Kit  converts 760E to 760P  16300 641  3 15 PSI Input Spring  Std  Temp   16300 331  Pressure Gauge Kit   3  Gauges 16300 442  90  Beacon Indicator Kit  for 1 4 Turn Actuators  16300 488  60  Flat Indicator Kit  for Lever Action Actuators  16300 486  90  Flat Indicator Kit  for 1 4 Turn Actuators  16300 487  3 15 PSI Conversion Kit  Hi Temp   16300 640  3 27 6 30 PSI Conversion Kit  Std  Temp   16300 771  Hi temp 3 27 PSI 16300 772  3
89. J     NJ     NB    and NC    must be protected against damage due to impact by mounting  into an additional housing     2  The connection facilities of the cuboidal inductive sensors  types FJ     NJ     NB    and NC    shall  be installed as such that at least a degree of protection of IP20 according to IEC publication  60529 1989 is met     3  The relationship between type of the connected circuit  maximum permissible ambient temperature  and temperature class as well as the effective internal reactances for the individual types of  cuboidal inductive sensors  is shown in tables No 1 and No 2 given in this 4  supplement to EC   type examination certifcate PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X     4  When the following types of cuboidal inductive sensors are applied corresponding to explosion  groups and equipment categories tabulated below  inadmissible electrostatic charge of the plastic  housing has to be avoided  An appropriate warning note is to be indicated the equipment                                                                   type application as application as  category 1 category 2  equipment equipment  L FJ 6 110 N    IIB IIC IIC  FJ 7 N            NCB2 F 1 NO    IIC    NCB2 V3 NO    IIC    NBN3 F69 NO       NBN4 V3 NO    IC    NBN4 V3 NO  IC    Y189289  NCN4 V3 NO    IIC fe  NCB15 U    NO    IIC IC  NCN15 M    NO   IIC    NCB20 L2 NO    IIC    NCN20 U    NO    IIC  NCN30 U    NO     NCB40 FP NO   HA IB IIC IIC  NCN40 U    NO    IIB IIC IC  NCNA0 L2 NO    IIC    NCN50 FP NO  
90. Marking  FM Approvals  Ltd accepts no responsibility for the compliance of the equipment against all applicable Directives in all  applications     This Certificate has been issued in accordance with FM Approvals Ltd s ATEX Certification Scheme     Approved Drawings    EE  een eme eem      429 850 153       18 08 05   590 ACM 4 20mA 3 15PSI T590 Transducer  zement      EEN  emeng mmm   Repper subasenby 100 Tan    ese  i  mme lama SampeiTHOTende      weerues               Bonen Moaea S Tanseer    asso  2   200708   Col Aen Teso Tansee                        AD Cone  EE  e 16      raeno so Tamse  emm            500 AGF AmA          TO Tad    EE  Instruction Manual  Se      HIS CERTIFICATE MAY ONLY BE REPRODUCED IN ITS ENTIRETY AND WITHOUT                                      FM Approvals Ltd  1 Windsor Dials  Windsor  Berkshire  UK  SL4 1RS  T   44  0  1753 750 000 F   44  0  1753 868 700 E mail  atex fmapprovals com www fmglobal com              ATEX 020  Feb 07  Page 3 of 4    SCHEDULE FM Approvals       Mres d the       org Carum    to EC Type Examination Certificate No  FMO7ATEX0002X    Drawing No  Rev   Date Title   Description       442 732 994 1 05 04 07   Label  ATEX  Typed T590 Transducer      These drawings were prepared by Circuit Tech Assembly LLC on behalf of ControlAir Inc  and  annotated by FM Approvals Ltd to permit their identification in this report     THIS CERTIFICATE MAY ONLY BE REPRODUCED IN ITS ENTI D WITHOUT CHANGE    FM Approvals Ltd  1 Windsor Dials  W
91. May 08   Minor correction pg 13   J  Sweeney    22 June 11 Correct pg 12  add SII J  Sweeney  Siemens Industry  Inc   Spring House PA  USA 19477 15032 7602 Sheet 5 of 13    Drawing No        Potentiometer Intrinsically Safe and Division 2 Installation   Ungrounded Circuit    Three Barriers    Safe Area    Voc lt  12V  Isc  lt  0 08A    Barrier  2          lt  12     Isc  lt  0 08      Voltage  Measuring  Circuit    Barrier  3  Voc  lt  12V  Isc  lt  0 08A    Hazardous Area   see sheet 1 for details                         1          Barriers  1   2         3 must be CSA Certified CSA and FM Approved single channel grounded  Shunt Diode Zener Barriers with Voc and Isc parameters as indicated     CSA Certified and FM Approved MTL 766 Single Channel Barrier is recommended for use as    barrier  1   2 and  3       Connections to the terminals TB1 V1 and TB1 V3 may be swapped       Potentiometer Cable Parameters for Intrinsic Safety   Ungrounded Circuit Three Barriers        Gas Groups    Maximum Values       Capacitance    Inductance    L R Ratio       A amp B    0 125 uF    110 uH    49 uH per Ohm       C amp E    0 57 uF    440 uH    190 uH per Ohm          D F amp G          1 52 uF    880 uH          390 uH per Ohm         Ambient Temperature Range  See Sheet 2 of 13     Details    Approved    Title    22 June 11 Correct pg 12  add SII    Siemens Industry  Inc   Spring House PA  USA 19477    J  Sweeney  J  Sweeney  J  Sweeney  J  Sweeney  J  Sweeney    Control Drawing for  Se
92. Model NJ2 V3 N        1         CSA Certified Pepperl  amp    Fuchs Proximity Sensor  Model NJ2 V3 N     2  O    25     0 05A Maximum    FM Division 2 Maximum Voltage 25 V    Proximity Switch Ambient Temperature Range  See Sheet 2 of 13    Details    22 June 11 Correct pg 12  add SII    Siemens Industry  Inc   Spring House PA  USA 19477    Approved  J  Sweeney  J  Sweeney  J  Sweeney  J  Sweeney  J  Sweeney    Title  Control Drawing for  Series 760 Valve Controller    Drawing No     15032 7602 Sheet 12 of 13       I P Module Installation Instructions    Determine the manufacturer of the supplied I P Module and follow the appropriate  instructions below     ABB Model 22 06 65    I P Module Intrinsically Safe Installation     CSA    I P Module  CSA Certified ABB Type 22 06 65  It is intrinsically safe when connected as per attached  ABB Control Document No  900842  Page 4 of 4     FM    See ABB Drawing No  900842  I P Module Installation in Division 2     Input Ratings  CSA Division 2 Current 4 20 mA  8V maximum  0 15A maximum    FM Division 2 Current 4 20 mA    I P Module Ambient Temperature Range  See Sheet 2 of 13   ControlAir Model T590    I P Module Intrinsically Safe Installation     CSA    I P Module  CSA Certified ControlAir Model T590  It is intrinsically safe when connected as per  attached ControlAir Control Document No  431 990 047     FM  See ControlAir Drawing No  431 990 047    I P Module Installation in Division 2     Input Ratings  CSA Division 2 Current 4 20 m
93. NJ    und NC    wird um die Typen NCN2 F56 N1    und NBN4 V3 NO    entsprechend  den erg  nzenden Pr  fungsunterlagen des Pr  fberichtes erweitert  F  r diese Typen gelten die unten  aufgef  hrten  Elektrischen Daten      Desweiteren d  rfen die quaderf  rmigen induktiven Sensoren der Typen FJ     NJ    und NC    zuk  nf   tig auch entsprechend den erganzenden Pr  fungsunterlagen des Pr  fberichtes gefertigt werden  Die    nderungen betreffen den inneren Aufbau  die Erweiterung der m  glichen Gie  harztypen  die Art und  Weise der Kennzeichnung mit Typschildern sowie den Typschl  ssel der Sensoren mit Unterteilen   Der Typschl  ssel dieser Sensoren kann mit einem zus  tzlichen Zeichen erganzt werden  z B  U3    U4   P3   P4       Die  Besonderen Bedingungen  insbesondere die Punkte 4 und 5 gelten f  r die Typen mit geander   tem Typschl  ssel sinngem       bertragen     Alle anderen Angaben gelten unverandert auch f  r diese erste Erganzung   Elektrische Daten    Auswerte  und  Versorgungsstromkreis                        in Z  ndschutzart Eigensicherheit EEx ia IIC IIB    bzw  EEx ib             nur zum Anschlu   an bescheinigte eigensichere Stromkreise    Seite 1 2    EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigungen ohne Unterschrift und ohne Siegel haben keine G  ltigkeit   Diese EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung darf nur unver  ndert weiterverbreitet werden   Ausz  ge oder Anderungen bed  rfen der Genehmigung der Physikalisch Technischen Bundesanstalt     Physikalisch Technische Bundesansta
94. NJ 40 U3 N     NJ 40 U44N     NJ 50 FP N P3     NJ 50 FP N P4       Braunschweig  19  April 2006    EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigungen ohne Unterschrift und ohne Siegel haben keine G  ltigkeit   Diese EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung darf nur unver  ndert weiterverbreitet werden   Ausz  ge oder Anderungen bed  rfen der Genehmigung der Physikalisch Technischen Bundesanstalt     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt    Bundesallee 100     D 38116 Braunschweig          Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt    Braunschweig und Berlin    5  ERGANZUNG  gem     Richtlinie 94 9 EG Anhang Ill Ziffer 6    zur EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X    Ger  t  Quaderf  rmige induktive Sensoren Typen FJ     NJ     NB    und NC     Kennzeichnung        ll 2 G EEx ia 1   T6 bzw  111    EEx ia IIC TG  Hersteller  Pepperl   Fuchs GmbH    Anschrift  Lilienthalstrasse 200  68307 Mannheim  Deutschland    Beschreibung der Erg  nzungen und Anderungen   Die quaderf  rmigen induktiven Sensoren der Typen FJ     NJ     NB    und NC    d  rfen zuk  nftig auch  wie in den Pr  fungsunterlagen zum Pr  fbericht PTB Ex 08 26271 beschrieben gefertigt und betrieben  werden     Die   nderungen betreffen die Erweiterung der Typenreihe NB     den inneren Aufbau  weitere  Alternative f  r das Vergussmaterial  weitere alternative LED Typen  sowie eine weitere Alternative f  r  die Aufbringung der Kennzeichnung     Des weiteren wurde die EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung an den aktuellen Normenstand angepasst  
95. NO    96  NCN20 U    NO     NCNS3O U    NO     NCB40 FP NO    NCNA4O  U     NO     NCN40 L2 NO     NCN50 FP NO     NJ 0 8 F N      NJ 1 5 F N      NJ 2 5 F N      NJ 2 F1 N      NJ 2 V3 N      NJ 3 V3 N      NJ AEN    NJ 6 F N   NJ 10 F N      NJ 15 U  N                                                                                                                         NJ 20 U  N  NJ 30 U  N    NJ 30P U  1N     NJ 40     N     NJ 50 FP N     Table 1  Application as category 1 equipment                                  Sheet 3 6       EC type examination Certificates without signature and official stamp shall not be valid  The certificates may be circulated  only without alteration  Extracts or alterations are subject to approval by the Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt   In case of dispute  the German text shall prevail     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt     Bundesallee 100     38116 Braunschweig  Germany       Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt    Braunschweig und Berlin  4  SUPPLEMENT TO EC TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X              maximum permissible ambient temperature in   C for application in  temperature class    T4    T6   T5   T4    T6   T5  T1       types          FJ 6 110 N    LE METRE    FJ 7 N    NCB2 F1 NO     NCB2 V3 NO     NCN2 F56 N1     NBN3 F69 NO     NBNA4 V3 NO     NBN4 V3 NO   Y189289  NCN4 V3 N0     NCB15 U    NO     NCN15 M    NO    NCB20 L2 NO     NCN20  U     NO     NCN30 U    NO     NCB40 FP NO    NCN40 U    NO   
96. P NO P4    NJ 50 FP N P4     NCB15 U4 NO    NJ 15 U34N    NJ 30 U44N     NCB20 L2 NO    NJ 15 U44N       Sheet 8 7    eg    EC type examination Certificates without signature and official stamp shall not be valid  The certificates may be circulated  only without alteration  Extracts or alterations are subject to approval by the Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt   In case of dispute  the German text shall prevail     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt e Bundesallee 100 e 38116 Braunschweig   GERMANY       Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt    Braunschweig und Berlin  5  SUPPLEMENT TO EC TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X    Applied standards  EN 60079 0 2006 EN 60079 11 2007 EN 60079 26 2007    Test report         Ex 08 26271    Braunschweig  November 26  2008       Sheet 7 7    eg  EC type examination Certificates without signature and official stamp shall not be valid  The certificates may be circulated  only without alteration  Extracts or alterations are subject to approval by the Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt   In case of dispute  the German text shall prevail                 Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt e Bundesallee 100     38116 Braunschweig   GERMANY    dawl  oi                    vu ez  35 58 er     wns             A                ost   2 07   L         0   9 2           eso     Lv0   066  LCE      inam                   ez  Vu        2 08    L         22 6       S   0 8          nux  O99                 ooe       oor   2 58  
97. S jou 51 pue suono   parjisse     snoprezed    1 euoz    I sse    0  UONI9UUO9 107 ATUO o quims st snjeredd y pojeroossy  qr  xq y uy                    sip 3urjeisur uou   poA o  0J oq snw  8       1    O NUOD s 1ormovgnueur snyeredde doo  uoneoo    snoprezeu pue snje1edd y poreroossy AL    PINI SI YIM 10  uoneoo                       snoprezey   aaziuviod             paesu eq        snyeseddy pojeroossy our  3do2u0   Aug      1opun         T3NNVH2 VSO pur po o1ddy WA    asnu snyeseddy payeroosse Jo uoneanaijuoo ou        Daun WSO    JINIS pue poAo1ddy WA 20 snw  snweddy poierooss y  uourdinbg 10 srorueg SI ou  eououry YHON            UIINASNVAL    OPA 10 SULA  SZ                             8    O6SL JO        jou jsnur snje1eddy           20              poj  euuoo Jusurd  nba                 eoueury YHON   1       EC TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE    2 Equipment or Protective systems intended for use in Potentially  Explosive Atmospheres   Directive 94 9 EC           EC Type Examination Certificate No  FMO7ATEX0002X  Equipment or protective system  T 590 AabK I P Converter   Type Reference and Name    5 Name of Applicant  ControlAir Inc    6 Address of Applicant  8 Columbia Drive    Amherst  NH 03031 USA    7 This equipment or protective system and any acceptable variation thereto is specified in the schedule to this  certificate and documents therein referred to     8 FM Approvals Ltd  notified body number 1725 in accordance with Article 9 of Directive 94 9 EC of 23 March 
98. Sensoren Typen FJ     NJ     NB    und NC     sind so zu errichten  dass mindestens die Schutzart IP20 gem     IEC Publikation 60529 1989    erreicht wird     Der Zusammenhang zwischen dem Typ des angeschlossenen Stromkreises  der h  chstzu   l  ssigen Umgebungstemperatur und der Temperaturklasse sowie den wirksamen inneren  Reaktanzen f  r die einzelnen Typen der quaderf  rmigen induktiven Sensoren ist den Tabellen 1  und 2 dieser 4  Erg  nzung der EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X zu    entnehmen     Bei Einsatz der folgenden Typen der quaderf  rmigen induktiven Sensoren entsprechend der  Explosionsgruppen und Ger  tekategorien der nachfolgenden Tabelle ist die unzul  ssige    elektrostatische Aufla    dung der Kunststoffgeh  use zu    Warnhinweis ist auf dem Ger  t anzubringen                             Typ Einsatz als Einsatz als  Kategorie 1  Kategorie 2   Gerat Gerat  FJ 6 110 N    IIB IIC  FJ 7 N    IIC Bee O O  NCB2 F1 NO       NCB2 V3 NO              NBN3 F69 NO    IIC er aml  NBNA V3 NO        NBN4 V3 NO  IIC D  Y 189289  NCNA V3 NO    IIC    NCB15 U    NO    IIC IIC  NCN15 M   NO         C        NCB20 L2 NO       NCN30 U    NO    IIC  NCB40 FP NO    NCN40 L2 NO    IIC    NCNSO FP NO       NJ25FN     E                NJ 2 F1 N    IIC ar eee  NJ 2 V3 N           oe eee ee  NE         NJ 3 V9 N      Ein entsprechender    Seite 5 6       EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigungen ohne Unterschrift und ohne Siegel haben keine G  ltigkeit   Diese EG Baumusterpr  
99. Sweeney    J  Sweeney Series 760 Valve Controller    19 May 08   Minor correction pg 13   J  Sweeney    22 June 11 Correct pg 12  add SII J  Sweeney  Siemens Industry  Inc   Spring House PA  USA 19477 15032 7602 Sheet 3 of 13    Drawing No        Potentiometer Installation    Potentiometer Intrinsically Safe and Division 2 Installation   Grounded Circuit Two  Barriers    Safe A  eS Hazardous Area     see sheet 1 for details    TB1  V3  Voc     10V  Isc     0 2A    Voltage Barrier  2  Measuring Voc     10V  Circuit Isc     0 2A    1  Barriers  1 and  2 must be CSA Certified and FM Approved single channel grounded Shunt   Diode Zener Barriers with Voc and Isc parameters as indicated  Alternatively  instead of two  single Channel Barriers  one CSA Certified and FM Approved Dual Channel grounded Shunt  Diode Barrier  with Voc and Isc parameters  for each channel as indicated for Barriers  1 and   2  may be used     CSA Certified and FM Approved MTL 710 Single Channel grounded Shunt Diode Zener Barrier  is recommended for use as Barriers  1 and  2     2  Connections to the terminals TB1 V1 and TB1 V3 may be swapped     3  Potentiometer Cable Parameters for Intrinsic Safety   Grounded Circuit Two Barriers        Maximum Values  Capacitance Inductance L R Ratio  A amp B 0 22 uF 110 uH 35 uH per Ohm  C amp E 0 90 uF 440 uH 140 uH per Ohm  D F amp G 2 40 uF 880 uH 280 uH per Ohm    Gas Groups                                  4  Ambient Temperature Range  See Sheet 2 of 13     Details 
100. T Zertifizierungsstelle   Am T  V 1   D 30519 Hannover mih     Head of the   Certification Body T  V NORD CERT   TUV CERT A4 0701 10 000 L   This certificate may only be reproduced without anychange  schedule included     Excerpts or changes shall be allowed bythe T  V Hannover Sachsen Anhalt e V   page 1 2    BA 02 04 00     13      14      15      16      17      18     wii      EC TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE N   TUV 99 ATEX 1487 X       SCHEDULE    Description of equipment or protective system    The Up transformer type Doc 901068 and 901069 is used for the transformation of an  impressed direct current of the range of O     20 mA into a proportional pressure  The  proportional pressure can be used for the control of pneumatically adjustable devices resp   mechanisms of every manner     Electrical data    Supply circuit in type of protection  Intrinsic Safety  EEx ia IIC   terminal      only for the connection to certified intrinsically safe  circuits    The permissible ambient temperature range in dependence of the temperature class and of the  input current has to be taken from the following table     temperature class  T6  55 C to  60 C  T6  T5 60 mA  14 60 mA  T5  T4 120 mA  T4    The effective internal inductance and capacitance is  negligibly small           Test documents are listed in the test report N   99 PX23890    Special condition for safe use   1  When using combustible gas as auxiliary energy the I P transformer type Doc 901069 has  to erected outdoors    2
101. T to M25 conduit adapter is provided  Siemens part number TGX 16300 1439      2 5 1 Non Hazardous Locations    An installation in a non hazardous location should be in accordance with the current editions ofthe National  Electrical Code and applicable local codes     CE Approved   EN50081 1 and EN50081 2 Emission   EN61000 6 1 and EN61000 6 2 Immunity   See the Declaration of Conformity at the end of this section  Shielded cable is required     2 5 2 Hazardous Locations  An installation in a hazardous location must be in accordance with the current edition of the National Electrical       Code and applicable local codes   A WARNING          Electrical shock hazard  at Explosion hazard WY  Can cause death or injury   122   e Modifications to the positioner      installation of non approved options N    will void the electrical approval     e Observe all pertinent regulations regarding installation in hazardous  area              For a positioner to be installed in a hazardous location  the approvals plate on that positioner  see Figure 1 2  must  display the following     e The NEC or CEC hazardous location s  for which the equipment is approved       September 2012 2 17       Installation SD760       e The FM or CSA logo   e Hazardous location classifications appropriate to the installation   Refer to control drawing 15032 7602 at the end of this section for FM entity parameters and to determine the need  for energy limiting barriers  A typical system consists of a positioner
102. TO NJ20 40 N                     1 Typ2    Typ3    Uiz16 V Ui 16V Ui 16V    an Ii   25 mA    34 mW Pi   64 mW    Ci  Li         NCB1 5   M  NO      90   100   74   89   100    CE Tm m BEC HEU HEC EECHE REC METUS  EE RUE   NCB2 12GM   NO     90   100   76   91   100   73   88   100   62   77        54   63     NCN4 12GK    NO      95   100   73   88   100   69   s4   100   s     66   so  39   54     NCN4 12GM   NO     95   100   76   91   100   73   88   100   62   77        54   63     NCBS 18GK   NO     95   100   73   88   100   69   84   100   SI   66   so  39   54     NCBS 18GM  NO     95   100   76   91   100   73   88   100   62   77   81_  54   63     NCN8 18GK   NO     95   100   73   88   100   69   84   100   SI   66   so   39   54     NCN8 18GM   NO     95   100   76   91   100   73   88   100   62   77   81_  54   63     NCB10 30GK  NO     105   100   73   88   100   69   84   100   SI   66   so  39   54     NCB10 30GM  NO     105   100   76   91   100   73   88   100   62   77        54   63     NCN15 30GK    NO      110   100   73   88   100   69   84   100   s    66   so  39   54     NCNT5 30GM   NO     110   100   76   91   100   73   88   100   62   77        54   63     NJ 0 2 10GM N      20   so   73   88   100   68   83   100   49   64   67   36   42     NJ 0 8 4 5 N               so  73   88   100   68   83   100   49   64   67   36   a2     NJ 0 8 5GM N      30   so   73   88   100   68   83   100   49   64   67   36   42     NJ 1  6 5  N        3o   so 
103. W  clockwise  cam lobe is  used  the feedback lever message should  face away from the 760                           4 When the CCW  counterclockwise  cam  lobe is used  the feedback lever message  should face the 760           MA00543a x    Clip Alignment Pin  When Present    Figure 2 9 Feedback Lever Orientation and Retaining Clip Position  Design Level D       September 2012 2 9    Installation SD760       2  Press the long un notched edge of the lever into the retaining clip and lift the two hooked ends of the clip  until they can be placed in two notches in the lever and hook onto the lever  See Figures 2 10 and 2 11     Figure 2 10 Placing the Feedback Lever into the Retaining Clip    Figure 2 11 Placing the Retaining Clip on the Feedback Lever    3  Then fasten the lever to the linear adapter using the supplied split lockwasher and nut     6  Fasten the feedback pin to the actuator shaft  This is often accomplished with a slotted bracket as shown in  Figure 2 4  In other instances the pin may be threaded into an existing hole in the stem block     7  Determine the required feedback pin length as follows   1  Hold the positioner against the actuator to simulate the installed position     2  Rotate the lever against the pin and mark the pin at the required length with a piece of tape  The pin must  be long enough to enter the slot in the lever and extend beyond the lever by at least 1 8 inch     3  Remove the pin and cut it to length  Remove any burrs and slightly bevel 
104. a valid production documentation  scale  1 1 date  2010 jun 03          F  PEPPERL FUCHS    Control Drawing change notice respons    US DRL    NAMUR SENSORS   FM sole approved   US DWR             116 0165F                   Twinsburg norm US GAP sheet 2 of 8             TABLE 4     INDUCTIVE SENSORS  NCB                 Typ 1        2        3        4   01  16   01   16   01   16   01  16                     ee    34 mW   64 mW   169 mW   242 mW  NCB2 F1 N0a EWECHIHECHEUCHETEEESECHEOEHECH 74  NCB2 V3 N0a                    AC HEC HE                     ORE IE 74  NCB4 12GMa NOa      120   50  74   89   100   69   84   100  51 66   74   39   2  52  NCB8 ISGMa N0a       120   50   74   89   100   69   84   100   51   66   74   39   52   52  NCB15 Ua N0a   110   160   73   88   100   66   81   100   45   60   89   30   45   74  NCB15 30GMa N0a   120   150   74   89   100   69   84   100   51   66   74  39   52   52  NCB40 FP N0a   220   360   73   88   100   66   81   100   45   60   89   30   45   74       Table 5   INDUCTIVE SENSORS  NCN               1        2        3        4  01  16   01   16   01   16   01  16    nn er  52 mA   76 mA    34 mW   64 mW   169 mW   242 mW    Model  NCN3 F24a N4a  NCN3 F24a SN4a  NCN3 F25a N4a  NCN3 F25a N4 K    NCN3 F25a N4   Y41364    NCN3 F25a SN4a  NCN3 F31a N4a  NCN3 F31K N4  Ya   NCN3 F31K N4a  NCN3 F36a N4a  NCN4 M3K N4a  NCN4 V3 N0a  NCNI15 Ma N0a  NCN20 Ua N0a  NCN30 Ua N0a  NCN40 Ua N0a  NCN50 FP N0a                oo   ioo  7    
105. abel Sample Ratings Label    Figure 1 1 Positioner Labels  Inside Cover    The approvals plate on the outside of the positioner shows agency approvals and certifications applicable to the  positioner     IMPORTANT    Before installing  operating or servicing a positioner  review the approvals plate  information        Figure 1 2 Approvals Plate    IMPORTANT  ATEX Certification   Mark one of the two check boxes on the approvals plate to  indicate degree of protection     1 2 1 Design Levels    This publication addresses three positioner design levels  A  B  and D  Significant changes are listed in Table 1 3   The design level of a positioner is shown as the next to last character in the positioner model designation        1 4 September 2012    SD760 Introduction       Table 1 2 Model Designation       Valve Positioner Base Model 760                                        Input Signal   4 to 20 mA     El  3 to 15 psig       3 to 27 psig P2  20 to 100 kPa   4  0 2 to 1 Bar P5  0 2 to 1 0 kg cm  P6       Action   1 2 inch to 4 inch stroke  with 3  60   cams    2 inch to 6 inch stroke  with 3  60  cams    1 4 turn  1 2 inch square shaft  with 3  90  cams   1 2 inch to 2 inch stroke  with 3  60   cams    1 4 turn  NAMUR style shaft  with 3  90  cams   1 4 turn 1 2 inch square shaft  with 3  60   cams   1 2 inch to 4 inch stroke lever  with 1  90  linear cam   2 inch to 6 inch stroke lever  with 1  90  linear cam   1 4 turn NAMUR shaft  with 3  60  cams          mou    It       Encl
106. additional information refer to ISA RP 12 6    2  The Entity Concept allows interconnection of intrinsically safe and associated  apparatus not specifically examined in combination as a system when the approved values of Voc   or  Uo  and Isc  or lo  for the associated apparatus are less than or equal to Vmax  or Ui  and Imax  or li   for the intrinsically safe apparatus and the approved values of Ca  or Co  and La  or Lo  for the  associated apparatus are greater than Ci   Ccable  Li   Lcable  respectively for the intrinsically safe  apparatus    3  Barriers shall not be connected to any device that uses or generates in excess of 250V rms or DC  unless it has been determined that the voltage is adequately isolated from the barrier    4  Note associated apparatus with only Zone 1 approved connections limits the mounting of the  sensors to Zone 1    5     a    in model number indicates option not affecting safety    6  NAMUR sensors are also nonincendive for Class     Division 2  Groups A B C  and D  Class II  Division 1   Groups EE  and G  Class III  Division 1  Class I  Zone 2  Groups IIC  IIB       T5 hazardous  classified   locations and need not be connected to an associated apparatus when installed in accordance with  Control Drawing 116 0155    7  The correlation between type of connected circuit  maximum permissible ambient temperature and  temperature class are indicated at the top of each Table    8  Model number NMB8 SAE16GM27 N1 FE V1 approved for Class I  Division
107. afety standards  for electrical circuits  high pressures  and corrosive  as well as  critical media     e        devices with explosion protection  training  instruction or authorization to work on electrical circuits for  systems that could cause explosions     e Training or instruction according to the safety standards in the care and use of suitable safety equipment   Scope    This manual does not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment  nor to provide for every possible  contingency to be met in connection with installation  operation  or maintenance  Should further information be  desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser s purposes  the  matter should be referred to the support group listed in the Customer Product Support section of this manual  The  contents of this manual shall not become part of or modify any prior or existing agreement  commitment or  relationship     Warranty  The sales contract contains the entire obligation of Siemens  The warranty contained in the contract between the  parties is the sole warranty of Siemens  Any statements continued herein do not create new warranties or modify the    existing warranty     General Warnings and Cautions       Ab me    An explosion proof device may be opened only after power is removed from the device           An intrinsically safe device loses its license as soon as it 1s operated in a circuit that does not meet the requirements  of the exam
108. and found to meet the requirements of these  standards     Standard Date Description  EN 60079 0 2006 Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres     Part  0 General requirements  IEC 60079 0 2004 modified        EN 60079 11 2007 Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres     Part  11  Equipment protection by Intrinsic safety  i    EN 60079 15 2005 Electrical apparatus for explosive atmospheres     Part 15  Construction  test and marking of type of protection  n  electrical  apparatus  IEC 60079 15 2005           Anhang A ist integraler Bestandteil dieser Erkl  rung   Annex A is integral part of this declaration Diese Erkl  rung bescheinigt die   bereinstimmung mit den genannten Richtlinien  ist jedoch keine Zusicherung von  Eigenschaften    Die Sicherheitshinweise der mitgelieferten Produktdokumentation sind zu beachten    This declaration certifies the conformity to the specified directives but contains no assurance of properties  The safety documentation accompanying the product shall be considered in    detail   Page 3 6    SIEMENS    Anhang EG Konformitatserklarung  EC Declaration of Conformity    No  A5E00362252        x  li 2 G Sira03ATEX2577X      ia      T6    Certification Notified Bod Certificate No   Sira Chester UK   Sira             2577   Issue 1    Ex ia IIC T4  T5 T6  Principal difference between EN 50014 1998 and EN 60079 0 2006    Difference   5 1 2 Special consideration of external sources of NA Model 760 is not intended to b
109. area with flammable gases and vapors with apparatus groups IIC   IIB  and IIA and with temperature classes T1  T2  T3  T4  T5  and T6     2  The equipment is certified for use in ambient temperatures in the range of  25 C to  85  C   40 C for  applications not requiring Ex nL or proximity switches  and should not be used outside this range     3  Installation shall be carried out in accordance with the applicable code of practice by suitably trained personnel     4  The equipment is not intended to be repaired by the user  Repair of this equipment shall be carried out by the  manufacturer in accordance with the applicable code of practice     5  Ifthe equipment is likely to come into contact with aggressive substances  then it is the responsibility of the  user to take suitable precautions that prevent it from being adversely affected  thus ensuring that the type of  protection is not compromised     1  Aggressive Substances  e g  acidic liquids or gases that may attack metals or solvent that may affect  polymeric materials     2  Suitable Protection  e g  regular checks as part of routine inspections or establishing from the material s  data sheet that 1t is resistant to specific chemicals     6  Certificate 03ATEX2577X has an    X    suffix that indicates that special conditions of certification apply   Intrinsically Safe  Ex ia  applications must be installed in accordance with the Special Conditions for Safe Use  declared in Certificate Sira 03ATEX 2577X     2 5 2 4 Hazar
110. azardous  Classified  Location  Class I  Division 1  Groups A  B  C  D     Refer to the    model number    label located under the cover in Class II  Division 1  Groups E  F  G   order to identify the configuration of 760 Valve Controller in Class III  Division 1   terms of options it is equipped with  Follow thereafter the   installation instructions below for the particular 760 Valve   Controller configuration   2  After selecting the configurations of the intrinsically safe loops   for the particular configuration of 760 Valve Controller  refer to so el Pot    Sheet 2 of this Control Drawing to determine the Temperature a   Code of Controller  Proximity  y Limit     v  Warning  l  Failure to follow the above instructions may impair  suitability of 760 Valve Controller for use in Hazardous  Locations    Installation Instructions    1  If 760 Valve Controller is equipped with 4 20 mA feedback option   refer to the sheet 3 of 13 of this control drawing    2  If 760 Valve Controller is equipped with Potentiometer  1K  option  e  refer to the sheets 4 to 7 of 13 of this control drawing     3  If 760 Valve Controller is equipped with Limit Switch  1 option   refer to the sheets 8 to 11 of 13 of this control drawing    4  If 760 Valve Controller is equipped with Proximity Switch  1  option  refer to the sheet 12 of 13 of this control drawing     5  If 760 Valve Controller is equipped with Limit Switch  2 option   refer to the sheets 8 to 11 of 13 of this control drawing    6  If 
111. bel  ATEX T590 Transducer    442 732 994 05 04 07   Label  ATEX  Typed T590 Transducer      These drawings were prepared by Circuit Tech Assembly LLC on behalf of ControlAir Inc  and ha n  annotated by FM Approvals Ltd to permit their identification in this report                             THIS TIFICATE MAY ONLY BE REPRODUCED IN ITS ENTIRETY WITHOUT C E    FM Approvals Ltd  1 Windsor Dials  Windsor  Berkshire  UK  SL4 1RS    T   44  0  1753 750 000 F   44  0  1753 868 700 E mail  atex fmapprovals com www fmglobal com    FM F ATEX 029  Fed 07     Page 4 of 4       FM Approved             encapsulated coil  at least 185 R    ABB Automation       1N5343B or comparable type    Characteristic  direct acting    Entity  Imax   125 mA  Ri according label    m        Voltage rating of Zener diodes   7 5 V  Power rating of Zener diodes   5 W    gung und wider          g durch Empf  nger od          P_FM_DWGS_ABB for Models V18311  amp  V18312    DET       DUDEN VE PME VIS me             Automation    Das Urheberrecht an dieser Zelchnung  verbleibt bel uns  Vervielfalti  Dritte hat zivit  und strafrechtliche Folgen     rechtilche Benutzun         ABB Automation Products    Control Document No  900842  for  P Converter Type 22 06 a       Hazardous Area  Class 1 Division 1 Groups     B  C  D       black        Intrinsically safe circuit  Vmax   40 V  Imax   125 mA  Ci z 0  Li 1mH                      Nonhazardous   rea                 Note  Location is allowed in Class Il  Ill     Divis
112. cally Safe and Division 2 Installation   Grounded Circuit Single    Barrier    Safe Area    Barrier    Indicator    Power Supply  O       Hazardous Area   see sheet 1 for details     TB2 6  Upper Switch     TB2 3  Lower Switch     TB2 4  Upper Switch  NO    OF O  TB2 1  Lower Switch  NC T    TB2 5  Upper Switch   TB2 2  Lower Switch     1  I  I  I  1  D    Barrier must be CSA Certified and FM Approved single channel grounded Shunt Diode Zener    Barrier     Limit Switch Cable Parameters for Intrinsic Safety   Grounded Circuit Single Barrier     A  Cable Capacitance may not exceed Ca of the barrier   B  Cable Inductance may not exceed La of the barrier or the cable L R ratio may not exceed    the L R ratio of the barrier     Ambient Temperature Range  See Sheet 2 of 13     Normally  TB2 1 and TB2 4 are connected to ground as shown  Alternativly  TB2 2 may be  grounded if no connection is made to TB2 1 and or TB2 5 may be grounded if no connection    is made to TB2 4     Details    22 June 11 Correct pg 12  add SII    Siemens Industry  Inc   Spring House PA  USA 19477    Approved  J  Sweeney  J  Sweeney  J  Sweeney  J  Sweeney  J  Sweeney    Title  Control Drawing for  Series 760 Valve Controller    Drawing No     15032 7602 Sheet 8 of 13       Limit Switch Intrinsically Safe and Division 2 Installation   Ungrounded Circuit  Single Barrier    Safe Area Hazardous Area   see sheet 1 for details     A     Power Supply     24 V max  Barrier Chapnel 1              2 3  Lower Switch 
113. cally safe circuits only  Maximum values     Be 1 type 2 I 3 ee 4    a EM    P    34 mW  P  64 mW JP    169 mW JP    242 mW                     The assignment of the type of the connected circuit to the maximum permissible ambient  temperature for use as category 1 apparatus and the temperature class as well as the effective  internal reactances for the individual types of cubical inductive sensors is shown in the following  table                          types maximum pue ambient temperature in   C for use  temperature class  ee  T1 T1 T1 T1    NCB2 F1 N0      90   100   56   68   96     61   89   28   40   68   13   25   53    E o       NK BR AE ORE HE        RES  INCN4 V3 NO         100   100   56   68   96   49   61   89   28   40   68   13   25   53     NCB15 U   NO     110   160   56   68   96   49   61          28   40   68   13   25   53     NCB40 FP NO     220            56   68   96   49   61   89   28   40   68   13   25   53    100   100   56   68   96   49   61   89   28   40   68   13   25   53     NCN20 U    NO      110   160   56   68   96   49   61   89   28   40   68   13   25   53     NCNS0 U   NO    110   160   56   68   96   49   61   89   28   40   68   13   25   53     NCN4O U   NO    120   130   56   68   96   49   61   89   28   40   68   13   25   53    INCNSO FP NO         220            56   68   96   49   61   89   28   40   68   13   25   53     NJ 2 V3 N         40   50   56   68   96   49   61   89   28   40   68   13   25   53    NJ 15 U  N   
114. cam and calibrate positioner before installing kit  Refer to Section 3 Cam Indexing and Positioner  Calibration        Install kit before indexing cam and calibrating the positioner     Before proceeding  note the following warning and cautions        A WARNING          Electrical shock hazard  9 Explosion hazard    Can cause death or injury        e Remove power from all wires and terminals before working on  equipment     e  n potentially hazardous atmosphere  remove power from equipment  before connecting or disconnecting power  signal  or other circuit     e Observe all pertinent regulations regarding installation in hazardous                area   A CAUTION    Pinch hazard             wr    Remove supply pressure before working on this equipment              September 2012 4 1    Option Kit Installation SD760       CAUTION    The temperature in the installed location must not exceed the temperature range stated in  Table 1 1 Positioner Specifications with an Installed Option Kit     For installation in a hazardous location  refer to Control Drawing 15032 7602 at the end  of Section 2 Installation     4 1 PC BOARD BASED OUTPUT OPTION KITS    This section provides installation details for the single function option kits in Figure 4 1 and for dual function board  kits that combine two of these options on a single PC board  Refer to Section 1 3 Optional Kits for a list of available  kits         LOWER SWITCH    UPPER SWITCH    En EC e  ei  c            d                C  2 
115. chrift und ohne Siegel haben keine G  ltigkeit   Diese EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung darf nur unver  ndert weiterverbreitet werden   Ausz  ge oder Anderungen bed  rfen der Genehmigung der Physikalisch Technischen Bundesanstalt     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt     Bundesallee 100    D 38116 Braunschweig    Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt PIB    Braunschweig und Berlin    2  Erg  nzung zur EG Baumusterpriifbescheinigung PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X    Elektrische Daten    Auswerte  und   Versorgungsstromkreis                         in Z  ndschutzart Eigensicherheit EEx ia IIC IIB  nur zum Anschlu   an bescheinigte eigensichere Stromkreise  H  chstwerte     ECH       25 mA    76 mA  Der Zusammenhang zwischen dem Typ des angeschlossenen Stromkreises  der h  chstzul  ssigen  Umgebungstemperatur f  r den Einsatz als Kategorie 1 Gerat und der Temperaturklasse sowie den    wirksamen inneren Reaktanzen f  r die einzelnen Typen der quaderf  rmigen induktiven Sensoren ist  der nachfolgenden Tabelle zu entnehmen                 l    25 mA        34 mW          H  chstzul  ssige Umgebungstemperatur in   C bei Einsatz in                          a iB ad li ad Bal  T1 T1 T1 T1   NCB2 F1 No      90   100   56   68   96   49   61   eo   28   40   68   13   25   53      NCB2 V3 NO      100   100   56   68   96   49   61   89   28   40   68   13   25   53    100   100   56   68   96   49   61   89   28   40   68   13   25   53     NCB15 U    NO      110   160   56   68   96   49   61   e
116. chtlinien  ist jedoch keine Zusicherung von  Eigenschaften    Die Sicherheitshinweise der mitgelieferten Produktdokumentation sind zu beachten    This declaration certifies the conformity to the specified directives but contains no assurance of properties  The safety documentation accompanying the product shall be considered in    detail   Page 4 6                           SIEMENS    Anhang EG Konformitatserklarung  EC Declaration of Conformity    No  A5E00362252     Principal difference between EN 50020 2002 and EN 60079 11 2007    Difference Compliance Comments    Level of protection    ic    introduced Model 760 is certified by Sira to    ia     Reduced separation distances when the pollution This is a relaxation of requirements    degree has been reduced by installation or  enclosure    New transient tests for let through energy during NA Not applicable to 760  crowbar operation   Introduction of infallible connection methods for NA Not applicable to 760  small SMD s on PCB s   Changes to the table of Temperature classification NA Not applicable to 760  of tracks on PCB s    New test to measure the maximum pressure in NA There are no batteries in 760   sealed battery containers   Guidence to assess the reduction of effective NA Not applicable to 760   capacitance when protected by series resistance   Alternate method to deal with spark ignition energy NA Not applicable to 760   in circuits with C and L   Alternate high voltage tests for transformers NA Not applicable to 
117. ck TB2  1 2 3 and 4 5 6   Ui   25V  Or    As an alternative to the proximity switches  two simple limit switches may be used  these switches  have minimum ratings of 0 25 A  125 V dc     Terminal block TB2  1 2 3 and 4 5 6     U    30V Or U    36 5 V Or U 42V Or U 55V  I    140 mA I    92 mA I   70 mA I    45 mA    Variation 1   This variation introduced the following changes     i     number of drawing changes were recognised  in addition  alternative and replacement  component devices were introduced  the product description has therefore been amended     This certificate and its schedules may only be    reproduced in its entirety and without change  Sira Certification Service  Rake Lane  Eccleston  Chester  CH4 9JN  England    Tel   44  0  1244 670900  Page 3 of 4 Fax   44  0  1244 681330  Email  info siracertification com    Web  www siracertification com    Form 9402           1    14  14 1    14 2    15    16    17  17 1  17 2    sira    CERTIFICATION    SCHEDULE    TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE Sira O3ATEX4578  Issue 1   DESCRIPTIVE DOCUMENTS   Drawings   Refer to Certificate Annexe     Associated Sira Reports and Certificate History                Issue Date Report no    Comment  0 14 May 2004 R52A10388A   The release of the prime certificate   1 12 October 2007 R52A16928A   This Issue covers the following changes     e All previously issued certification was rationalised  into a single certificate  Issue 1  Issue 0 referenced  above is only intended to reflect the his
118. com    14  14 1    14 2    15  15 1    sira    CERTIFICATION    SCHEDULE    EC TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE Sira 03ATEX2577X  Issue 1   DESCRIPTIVE DOCUMENTS   Drawings   Refer to Certificate Annexe    Associated Sira Reports and Certificate History                Issue Date Report no    Comment  0 19 May 2004 R52A10387A   The release of prime certificate   1 12 October 2007 R52A16928A   This Issue covers the following changes     e All previously issued certification was rationalised into a  single certificate  Issue 1  Issue 0 referenced above is  only intended to reflect the history of the previous  certification and has not been issued as a document in  this format    e The introduction of Variation 1                    SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR SAFE USE  denoted by X after the certificate number     The applicable electrical parameters and corresponding maximum ambient temperatures are defined as  follows and depend on the type of I P Converter fitted     Table 1  I P Converter  Converter Terminals dependant on I P Converter fitted                                                                                                 FM 07ATEX0002X  ControlAir Inc   TUV 99ATEX1487X  ABB   TClass   Tamb  Max Ii Ui Pi T Class   Tamb  Max Ii  T6  55  C to  55  C 60 mA 38 8V   2 328 W T6  55  C to  55  C   60 mA  T6  55  C to  60  C 50 mA 42 5 V   2 125 W T6  55  C to  60  C   50 mA  T5  55  C to  85  C 23 mA 6 75 V   0 155 W T5  55  C to  45  C   120 mA  T5  55  C to  45  C 120       
119. cs  15032 7612 6 of 6 1 10 Feb 04 Pneumatic and mechanical schematic  5 1030 1 of 1 B 24 Feb 04 Label  general  Issue 1  Number Sheet Rev  Date Description    Sira stamp   15032 7612 1 of 7 6 03 Oct 07 General view  standard case  15032 7612 2 of 7 6 03 Oct 07 I P Converter  15032 7612 3 of 7 6 03 Oct 07 Option PCB parts  15032 7612 4 of 7 6 03 Oct 07 Option PCB layout  15032 7612 5 of 7 6 03 Oct 07 Option board schematics  15032 7612 6 of 7 6 03 Oct 07 Pneumatic and mechanical schematic  15032 7612 7 of 7 6 03 Oct 07 Miscellaneous notes    This certificate and its schedules may only be    reproduced in its entirety and without change     Form 9400 Issue 1    Sira Certification Service    Rake Lane  Eccleston  Chester  CH4 9JN  England    Tel   44  0  1244 670900  Page 1 of 1 Fax   44  0  1244 681330  Email  info siracertification com    Web  www siracertification com       HAZARDOUS  CLASSIFIED  LOCATION NON HAZARDOUS LOCATION    CLASS I  ZONE 2  GROUPS IIC  IIB  IIA  Ta   50  C  T5  CLASS I  DIVISION 2  GROUPS A  B  C and D   CLASS Il  DIVISION 1  GROUPS E  F and G   CLASS Ill DIVISION 1 HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS    PROXIMITY SENSORS    Models C  Capacitive      Analog Inductive   M  Magnetic   N   Discrete Inductive   S  Slot   R  Ring  followed by combination    of numbers and letters      dashes and or     pluses may be        Control Device    OOO    See Table 1  for sensors with nonincendive field wiring parameters   See Table 2  for sensors with exceptions        NOTES     
120. d NC     sind so zu errichten  dass mindestens die Schutzart IP20 gem     EN 60529 1991   A1 2000    erreicht wird     Der Zusammenhang zwischen dem Typ des angeschlossenen Stromkreises  der h  chstzu   l  ssigen Umgebungstemperatur und der Temperaturklasse sowie den wirksamen inneren  Reaktanzen f  r die einzelnen Typen der quaderf  rmigen induktiven Sensoren ist den Tabellen 1  und 2 dieser 5  Erganzung der EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X zu  entnehmen     Bei Einsatz der folgenden Typen der quaderf  rmigen induktiven Sensoren entsprechend der  Explosionsgruppen und Ger  tekategorien der nachfolgenden Tabelle ist die unzul  ssige  elektrostatische Aufladung der Kunststoffgeh  use zu vermeiden und ein entsprechender  Warnhinweis ist auf dem Ger  t anzubringen     Typ Einsatz als Einsatz als  Kategorie 1  Kategorie 2   Ger  t Ger  t    FJ 6 110 N       IIB IC    FJ 7 N    NCB2 F1 NO     NCB2 V3 NO     NBN3 F69 NO     NBNA4 V3 NO     NBNA4 V3 NO Y 189289  NBB15 U K NO     NBB20 U K NO     NBN30 U K NO             NCB20 L2 NO     NCN20 U    NO     NCN30 U    NO                IIC  IIC  IIC  IIC  IIC    NCN4 V3 NO    ner Tele     NCB15 U    NO         lic  NCN15 M    NO           IIC                            NCB40 FP NO   IIC  NCN40 U    NO      NCNA0 L2 NO    IIC   NCN50 FP NO     NJ 2 5 F N                  NJ 2 F1 N      ic      1 1         NJ 2 V3 N                 Seite 5 7                EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigungen ohne Unterschrift und ohne Siegel
121. d to constitute an electrostatic  discharge hazard  Clean only with a damp cloth    The I P converter enclosure s metal base must be mounted as part of a bonded  structure    The I P converter enclosure contains aluminium and is considered to constitute a  potential risk of ignition by impact or friction and must be taken into account during  installation    The User shall permanently mark the protection type chosen  Once the type of protection  has been marked it shall not be changed       Health and Safety Requirements     The relevant EHSRs that have not been addressed by the standards listed in this certificate have been    identified    and assessed in the confidential report identified in item 8     THIS CERTIFICATE MAY ONLY BE REPRODUCED IN ITS ENTIRETY AND WITHOUT CHANGE    FM Approvals Ltd  1 Windsor Dials  Windsor  Berkshire  UK  SL4 1RS  T   44  0  1753 750 000 F   44  0  1753 868 700 E mail  atex fmapprovais com www fmalobal com    FM F ATEX 020  Feb 07  Page 2 of 4    16    17         SCHEDULE   Cillum    to EC Type Examination Certificate No  FMO7ATEX0002X ii    Test and Assessment Procedure and Conditions   This EC Type Examination Certificate is the result of testing of a sample of the product submitted  in    accordance with the provisions of the relevant specific standard s   and assessment of supporting  documentation  It does not imply an assessment of the whole production     Whilst this certificate may be used in support of a manufacturer s claim for CE 
122. dex on the input shaft so the pin extending from the index engages the elongated  hole in the cam        September 2012 3 3    Cam Indexing and Positioner Calibration SD760       4  Install the upper cam index so the teeth on its rear face engage the teeth in the lower cam index and the slot  engages the input shaft  Loosely thread the cam locking nut onto the input shaft  Do not tighten at this time     Cam Locking Nut        MG00555a  5      e     Q  5  B     5  e      Ee    IMPORTANT    While the positioner  is operating  the cam  follower should    1  Move between the    Cam    index triangles on the Input Shaft    selected cam lobe  2  Never enter the  cam valley   see the  adjacent figure    Cam Follower       Figure 3 4 Cam Index Components    7  To index the cam     1  Lift the upper cam index to disengage it from the lower cam index  Rotate the cam and carefully align the  minimum input  Min Range  index triangle on the cam with the point of contact of the cam follower  bearing  See Figures 3 1  3 4  and 3 5     e Use the lobe marked CW for clockwise cam rotation with increasing input signal   e Use the lobe marked CCW for counterclockwise cam rotation with increasing input signal     2  Hold the cam in place and press the upper cam index against the lower cam index  Be sure to engage the  slot in the upper cam index with the input shaft  Tighten the knurled cam locking nut  Tighten the cam  locking screw     MH00545a                Indexing of CW Cam Lobe Indexing o
123. dous Location Installation Steps    Perform the following steps to install the positioner in a hazardous location  Note that barriers may not be needed in  an installation     1  Install positioner as detailed in the preceding sections     2  Install energy limiting barriers in the non hazardous area  Refer to the barrier manufacturer s manuals and to  the appropriate connection diagram in the control drawing s  found in this manual     3  Install conduit for wiring to positioner  Install pull boxes as needed and remove burrs and sharp edges from  conduit tubing        September 2012 2 19    Installation SD760       4  Install wiring between positioner and barriers per the control drawing s  found in this manual  Ground the  positioner  A barrier must be grounded and the resistance to ground must not exceed 1 Ohm     5  Install the wiring between barriers and output terminals of the positioner driving device   6  Check all signal and ground connections before applying power     7  Proceed to Section 3 Cam Indexing and Positioner Calibration     2 5 2 5 Control Drawings  Declarations  and Certifications    The following pages contain the appropriate 760 and component certification documents including EC Declaration  of Conformity  control drawings  and certificates     IMPORTANT    After completing the steps in Section 2 Installation  go to Section 3 Cam Indexing and  Positioner Calibration to index the cam and calibrate the positioner        2 20 September 2012    Safe Area H
124. dovi ti c do tciuoi t  idvo do qQjqoIqu 4IqQ  ICQ Q QO                                          t   t0  t0   t0  tO   tO   tO   NO   tO  LO   tO   LO   EO   tO   LO   FO   LO   IO ive  ito    LO   LOO   LO   t   tO   IO  tO  tO                                                                                         9   1   219       I oloo olojo DO  GO  D O  OF olojo      MO  OF HI Hl Bl Hl Bl BIC is ig  jiei je  ILA Se  elel           COE COE   ETI OO            pe 17107      o                                                          e                                                 Hl Hl SSS            SI SISISISISIS SIC Si s s ele  o S   ma                DDd A A Bad         AS ad ATA DPA TED        PNTA         US                 O                    co  N  D B D   D  CO        vii osi epu       SE   3    SR       EA              JoJoO  O  E  Pollet 12 gs EISCHEN EES TEE  m oO    e eed s xu Si E  5151518 1510121212 Zio t ZSEE Z  zZ  dg  dziziziz  ZIZ IIIS xix xX Z UU ci  le           gt  gt  gt   S 7      IOIO  1           1519 AUS 15 IAS IN  a 4141412212 3 z    prn ru  1                                      zd D ju              LAS EA KA kend MSIE EH B                 gt    gt                       TIE PH ITI     ara                      2   7   5  2111015151199 912105        ke a  ees Ke  161  21212121   0212121 lz liz            NINA e KE El Kl ht   3 Oo  ojoi mjmimimimimimi OJjO JOJO O O  O O O O 3I3 313131212121 212 2 213                                               
125. e   Spring House  PA19477 0900  USA   7 This equipment and any acceptable variation thereto are specified in the schedule to this certificate and  the documents therein referred to    8 Sira Certification Service certifies that this equipment has been found to comply with the Essential  Health and Safety Requirements that relate to the design of Category 3 equipment  which is intended  for use in potentially explosive atmospheres  These Essential Health and Safety Requirements are given  in Annex II to European Union Directive 94 9 EC of 23 March 1994    The examination and test results are recorded in the confidential reports listed in Section 14 2    9 Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements  with the exception of those listed in the  schedule of this certificate  has been assessed by reference to   EN 50021 1999   10 If the sign    X    is placed after the certificate number  it indicates that the equipment is subject to special  conditions for safe use specified in the schedule to this certificate    11 This TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE relates only to the design of the specified equipment  and not  to specific items of equipment subsequently manufactured    12 The marking of the equipment shall include the following      9 nac   EEx nL      T5  Ta  25  C to  85  C   Project Number 52  16928 C Ellaby  C  Index 11 Certification Officer    This certificate and its schedules may only be  reproduced in its entirety and without change     Sira Certificatio
126. e   heating and cooling connected to a separate external source  of heating or cooling   5 2 Re definition of  Service Temperature  used NA This change does not affect the pre    to decide pre conditioning of plastic enclosures conditioning of the beacon and flat plate   5 5 Importation of small component requirements NA   from Ex i  EN 50021 1999 having the same    windows  Model 760 has been certified by Sira for  6 4 Consideration of circulating currents in YES  enclosures  requirement  6 5 Gasket retention Model 760 has been certified by Sira to  YES                                            Model 760 has been certified by Sira to       Ex I    EN 50021 1999 having the same  requirement   Model 760 has been designed and  manufactured after a due analysis of  possible operating faults in order as far as  possible to preclude dangerous situations  This is a relaxation of the requirement        Additional ATEX requirements on Operating  Faults                   7 1 3 Acceptance of RTI as alternative to TI               7 3 2 Importation of Zone 0 requirements for Model 760 is not designed for Zone 0    static and light metals           8 1 2 Relaxation in light metal requirements for This is a relaxation of the requirement    Group il             7 4 2 New anti static tests Not applicable to 760          Anhang A ist integraler Bestandteil dieser Erklarung      Annex A is integral part of this declaration Diese Erkl  rung bescheinigt die Ubereinstimmung mit den genannten Ri
127. e 2 5 Feedback Lever Assemblies  Linear Applications  Design Levels A  B  and D    Integral  One Piece  Feedback  Lever and Input Shaft for  Linear Application    Feedback Lever Weld    Note  For rotary applications   the input shaft has aNAMUR or  square shaft end  See Figure  2 13     Other integral shaft ends are  NAMUR and 0 5    square        Retaining Clip    Figure 2 6 Integral Feedback Lever Input Shaft  Design Levels A and B       September 2012 2 7    Installation SD760       Actuator er    Positioner       Actuator Stem Coupler    Slotted Stem Bracket       We bs Oe Feedback Lever  Feedback Pin    A  Positioner Mounting and Preferred Method of Connecting Feedback Pin        ins g         ven  Adapter Slotted Stem  Bracket         Et    e        Equal To      IN   Stroke      7               1 el    Equal to            1  0 866 x Stroke at 4   2  Mid Stroke Feedback Pin 7 5  Feedback Lever t  B  Preferred Method of Stroke Setting for C  Method of Connecting Feedback Pin and  Feedback Pin Connection Stroke Setting    Figure 2 7 Positioner Mounting and Feedback Pin Connection       2 8 September 2012    SD760 Installation       Feedback Lever  for 5 16  N  Diameter Pin bul    Feedback  Pin       Retaining Clip _   Linear Adapter See   S Positioner          5 Input Shaft mW   Design Level D    Figure 2 8 Separate Input Shaft and Feedback Lever for Linear Actuators    Mechanical Installation    l     5 16  Feedback Retaining    Determine needed cam characteristic  linea
128. e LED types  as well as a further alternative for the  application of the marking     Furthermore  the EC type examination certificate was adapted to the current state of standards   Therefore the marking has changed as follows      amp   II2G ExiallC T6  or Il 1G Ex ia      T6    The EC type examination certificate is extended for the following types of cuboidal inductive sensors     NBB15 U K NO     NBB20 U K NO     NBN30 U K NO     NBN40 U K NO       Sheet 1 7    nn    EC type examination Certificates without signature and official stamp shall not be valid  The certificates may be circulated  only without alteration  Extracts or alterations are subject to approval by the Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt   In case of dispute  the German text shall prevail     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt     Bundesallee 100     38116 Braunschweig    GERMANY       Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt    Braunschweig und Berlin  5  SUPPLEMENT TO EC TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X    For improved comprehensibility the    electrical data  as well as the tables which form the relationship  between maximum permissible ambient temperature  temperature classes  electrical data and  equipment catagories  are represented for all types of cuboidal inductive sensors as follows     Furthermore  the altered    Special Conditions  are represented  These are applicable to all types  specified in this EC type   xamination certificate     Electrical data    Evaluation and  supp
129. e been discontinued  Table 1 5 lists the  universal replacement shaft kit for design levels A  B  and D  The table also lists the  NAMUR  square  and linear adapters  and feedback levers  to be used with the  universal shaft kit     The following procedure is provided for users with one piece design level A or B shaft kits in spare  parts stock  While installing the kit  refer to the exploded view of the positioner in the Parts List  section and to the instruction supplied with the kit     1  Remove supply pressure from the Positioner     2  Remove the positioner cover  Remove beacon flat indicator  shaft extension  and compression washer  if  installed   Remove PC board based option board  if installed         4 10 September 2012    SD760 Option Kit Installation       3  Loosen the cam locking screw  Remove the cam lock nut  upper and lower cam indexes  and the cam  See  Figures 3 1 and 3 4 as needed     4  Pull the input shaft out through the back of the positioner enclosure  The retaining ring  thrust washer  and O   ring will remain attached  These parts are pre installed in shaft kits     CAUTION  O rings are pre lubricated  If additional lubrication is needed  Molykote 55 is  recommended for standard black O rings and Dow Corning 3451 is recommended for  orange silicon O rings  Do not use a silicone based lubricant     5  Insert the input shaft from the kit through the back of the positioner  threaded end first  Rotating the shaft  slightly while inserting will ease ins
130. e e ette eee ne E D d tete ee 1 5  1 3  Desin Eeyels eec vei ie ek eed Au le t Te Re 1 6  1 4   Bracket  Kits               Be el e aie Bin obe ere hee dee e een Keown ed 1 7  1 5 Cam  Input Shaft  Indicator  Output  and Other                                                    1 8  22    Pneumatic Connections ore ente en ae oo ee ALA a ie e      cabe dte neni iussi  2 14       ii September 2012    SD760 Contents       2 2  Pneumatic CohfiectIOR s     Ue RITE EA  2 3 Actuator Fail Position with Loss of Input Signal or Supply Air  4 1 TB2 Terminal Block Connections    teet sen iere ere Ene          Ee ER e ie dee ded  4 2 Limit Switch Position for Reverse or Direct Action          sesessessssseseeseeeeeeeee nennen enne enne enne nnns  4 3 Connections for         Feedback Optioner eene nennen nennen ener enne       Changes for Revision 8  September 2012                Section Change   Cover Revision number and date updated    Introduction Table 1 5 updated to include part numbers for Design Level D Universal Input Shaft and  typical adapter and feedback lever kits           ValvePAC is a trademark of Siemens Industry  Inc  Viton   is a registered trademark of DuPont Performance Elastomers  All  product designations may be trademarks or product names of Siemens Industry  Inc  or other supplier companies whose use by  third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owners     Siemens Industry  Inc  assumes no liability for errors or omissions in this document 
131. e specified in the schedule to this certificate     11 This Type Examination certificate relates only to the design  examination and tests of the specified  equipment or protective system in accordance to the directive 94 9 EC  Further requirements of the Directive  apply to the manufacturing process and supply of this equipment or protective system  These are not  covered by this certificate    12 The marking of the equipment or protective system shall include        13G ExnL IIC T  Ta    55 C to Ta max           ExnAnL IIC T6 Ta    55  C to  85  C   Temperature class and maximum ambient temperature as indicated on Page 2    Lt bd    Andrew Was    General Manager  FM Approvals Ltd  FM Approvals   Issue date  zu Le        2 Js NE KD Z  THIS CERTIFICATE MAY ONLY BE REPRODUCED IN ITS ENTIRETY THOUT CHANGE       FM Approvals Ltd  1 Windsor Dials  Windsor  Berkshire  UK  SL4 1RS  T   44  0  1753 750 000 F   44  0  1753 868 700 E mail  atex fmapprovals com www fmglobal com    FM F ATEX 029  Feb 07  Page 1 of 4    SCHEDULE FM Approvals                of tthe PM Glos Coon    to Type Examination Certificate No  FMO7ATEX0003X    13 Description of Equipment or Protective System     The T590 is an electro mechanical current to pressure converter  The unit s electronics operates on  a 4 to 20 mA current loop  The ambient operating temperature range of the T590 is  55 C to 85 C   however the temperature class and the maximum permitted operating temperature are dependent  on the Energy Lim
132. e subject to approval by the Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt   In case of dispute  the German text shall prevail     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt   Bundesallee 100     38116 Braunschweig  Germany       Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt    Braunschweig und Berlin  4  SUPPLEMENT TO EC TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X    The operating conditions for application as category 1 equipment are newly predefined with this 4   supplement for the following types of cuboidal inductive sensors     FJ 6 110 N    NJ 1 5 F N      FJ 7 N    NJ 2 F1 N     NCN2 F56 N1    NJ 2 5 F N     NBN3 F69 NO    NJ 3 V3 N     NBNA4 V3 NO    NJ 4 F N     NBN4 V3 N0 Y 189289 NJ 6 F N     NCN40 L2 N0    NJ 10 F N     NCB20 L2 NO    NJ 15 M1  N     NJ 0 8 F N    NJ 30P U  1N       For improved comprehensibility the  electrical data  as well as the tables which form the relationship  between maximum permissible ambient temperature  temperature classes  electrical data and  equipment catagories  are indicated for all types of cuboidal inductive sensors as follows     Furthermore  the altered  Special Conditions  are specified   Electrical data    Evaluation and  supply CITCUIL   een type of protection Intrinsic Safety EEx ia IIC IIB  resp  EEx ib IIC IIB  only for connection to certified intrinsically safe circuits  maximum values     i i U   16V JE     52 mA  P    169  mW    For the application as category 1 equipment the evaluation and  supply circuit must correspond to type of
133. ed 1  ppm under normal operating conditions        2 16 September 2012    SD760 Installation       2 5 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS    Refer to the nameplate inside the cover for positioner model and installed options  Read the approvals plate on the  side of the positioner for approvals and certifications  and for permitted installation environments  Models and  options requiring electrical connections are listed below     Model 760E  4 20 mA input signal wiring to I P Transducer  Model 760P or Model 760E with any of the following options   4 20 mA feedback board  1K Ohm potentiometer board  Mechanical limit switch board  Proximity sensors limit switch board    Refer to Table 1 1 for positioner environmental ratings when an option board is installed  Wiring connections are  shown in Section 4 Option Kit Installation for each circuit board based option kit and the I P converter  Also refer to  Siemens control drawing 15032 7602  at the end of this section  for electrical specifications and wiring     Electrical Conduit Connection    The positioner enclosure has a NEMA 4X rating  To maintain the rating when any electrical option is installed  a  sealed electrical connection must be made using appropriate conduit and non hardening pipe sealant                  Design level A and B positioners have either a 3 4 NPT or M25 conduit connection thread  as specified  on the order  All design level D positioners have a 3 4 NPT thread  When a metric conduit connection is  specified  a 3 4 NP
134. el A or B positioner with a design level D positioner  note the  following two considerations     A  Feedback Pin Diameter    The 1 4 inch feedback pin employed in a design level A or B installation should not be used with the design level D  feedback lever that has a 5 16 inch slot  Figure 5 1 shows the design level A or B lever and feedback pin  Figure 5   2 shows the design level D pin and lever  Instead  the feedback pin should be changed to the 5 16 inch diameter pin  to snugly fit the design level D feedback lever     Note    In some cases it may be necessary to change additional mechanical feedback  components when replacing a design level A or B positioner with a design level D  positioner        September 2012 5 1    Maintenance SD760         S Feedback Lever    eek       Retaining  Spring  Clip E        Cg jL              1 4  Feedback Pin    Figure 5 1 Feedback Lever for 1 4 Inch Feedback Pin  Design Levels A and B    5 16  Feedback Pin    Va Feedback Lever  IN 2 y         s   Retaining Clip       Figure 5 2 Feedback Lever for 5 16 Inch Feedback Pin  Design Level D    B  Conduit Connection Thread    All design level D enclosures have a 3 4 NPT conduit connection  To accommodate an M25 conduit connection  a  3 4 NPT to M25 adapter is available  order part number TGX  16300 1439      5 3 SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS    Refer to the Parts List section following Section 5 for a list of replacement parts and an exploded view  Spare and  replacement parts are available fr
135. em     Richtlinie 94 9 EG Anhang Ill Ziffer 6    zur EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X    Ger  t  Quaderf  rmige induktive Sensoren Typen FJ     NJ    und NC     Kennzeichnung        ll 2 G EEx ia      T6  Hersteller  Pepperl   Fuchs GmbH    Anschrift  K  nigsberger Allee 87  68307 Mannheim  Deutschland    Beschreibung der Erg  nzungen und Anderungen    Die nachfolgend aufgef  hrten quaderf  rmigen induktiven Sensoren Typen NJ    und NC   d  rfen  zuk  nftig auch in explosionsgefahrdeten Bereichen eingesetzt werden  die den Einsatz von Kategorie  1 Ger  ten erfordern     Die   nderungen betreffen ausschlie  lich die  Elektrischen Daten   ge  nderte h  chstzul  ssige  Umgebungstemperaturen f  r den Einsatz als Kategorie 1 Ger  t  Reduzierung des eigensicheren  Auswerte  und Versorgungsstromkreises auf die Kategorie ia  sowie die Kennzeichnung der  nachfolgend aufgef  hrten Typen der quaderf  rmigen induktiven Sensoren     NCB2 F 1 NO    NCN2O U    NO    NJ 20 U  N     NCB2 V3 NO    NCN30O U    NO    NJ 30 U  N     NCN4 V3 N0    NCN40 U    NO    NJ 40     N     NCB15 U    NO    NCN50 FP NO    NJ 50 FP N     NCB40 FP NO    NJ 2 V3 N      NCN15 M    NO    NJ 15 0           Die Kennzeichnung der oben aufgef  hrten Sensoren lautet f  r den Einsatz als Kategorie 1 Ger  t  zuk  nftig        2 I1 4 G EEx ia IIC T6    Die  Besonderen Bedingungen  gelten unverandert auch f  r den Einsatz als Kategorie 1 Ger  t     Seite 1 3    EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigungen ohne Unters
136. erature  760P with no electrical options and no approvals   29 C to  149  C   20  F to  300  F   Ozone resistant with Viton   fluoroelastomer and iso elastomeric spring   Ozone resistant with Viton amp  fluoroelastomer and standard spring     DO          Gauges  Not Required N  Gauges  3 P G       Limit Switch Boards     Not Required N  Mechanical 1  Proximity Switches  NAMUR Standard        Output Options       Not Required   Potentiometer 1K Ohm   4 20 mAdc Feedback   Potentiometer  1K Ohm with Stainless Steel Feedback Gear  4 20 mA Feedback with Stainless Steel Feedback Gear    RWNHZ       Design Level D          Electrical Certification  Refer to Specifications  2   Non Approved N                  ATEX   CE                        7    a          Notes    1  Not available with High Temperature Option  2  Consult factory for other certifications    3  Discontinued option  shown for reference only  For 3 4NPT to M25 conduit adapter  order TGX 16300 1439  The speed adjuster function can  be implemented with an externally piped flow restrictor such as ASCO catalog number V0222 or equivalent    4  Used on small volume actuators  1      piston diameter less than 4   10mm         September 2012 1 5    Introduction SD760       Table 1 3 Design Levels    Design Level Significant Features or Changes From Previous Design Level    Initial design level  External dimensions shown in Figure 2 1     Input shaft with one of the following integral shaft ends  feedback lever  with slot for 1
137. ern the the internal construction  the extension of possible types of casting resin  the way of  marking with type plates as well as the type code of sensors with bottom parts    The type code of these sensors may be supplemented with additional marks  e g  U3   U4   P3   P4       The  Special Conditions   particularly item 4 and 5 are anlogously valid for types with changed type  code     All other details are also valid for this 1st  supplement without changes   Electrical data    Evaluation and  supply Circuit  rennen type of protection Intrinsic Safety EEx ia IIC IIB    resp  EEx ib IIC IIB  for connection to certified intrinsically safe circuits only    Sheet 1 2    EC type examination Certificates without signature and official stamp shall not be valid  The certificates may be circulated  only without alteration  Extracts or alterations are subject to approval by the Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt   In case of dispute  the German text shall prevail     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt    Bundesallee 100 e D 38116 Braunschweig       Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt PIB    Braunschweig und Berlin  1  SUPPLEMENT TO EC TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X    Maximum values     ES    1  25           25        l 252mA   1  76 mA        34 mW        64 mW        169 mW        242 mW       The correlation between type of connected circuit  maximum permissible ambient temperature         temperature class as well as the effective internal reactances f
138. erter  FM 07ATEX0003X     i  I P Converter terminals  Ex nL version                                          FM 07ATEX0003X  ControlAir Inc        Class   Tamb  Ii Ui Pi   T4  55  C to  85  C_  60 mA 38 8 V 2 328 W  T4  55  C to  85  C   100 mA 30V 3 0 W  T4  55  C to  80       120 mA  28V 3 36 W  T4  55  C to  70       150mA   25 5 V 3 825 W  T5  55  C to  70  C   60 mA 38 8 V 2 328 W  T5  55  C to  55  C   100 mA  30V 3 0 W  T5  55  C to  45  C   120        28V 3 36 W  T5  55  C to  85       23 mA 6 75 V 0 155 W  T6  55  C to  60  C   50 mA 42 5 V 2 125 W  T6  55  C to  55       60 mA 38 8 V 2 328 W                         ii  I P Converter terminals  Ex nAnL version      Ui   40V  Ii   20mA  Tamb   55  C to  85  C     This certificate and its schedules may only be    reproduced in its entirety and without change     Tel   44  0  1244 670900  F 9402 I 1 Page 2 SS Fax   44  0  1244 681330  SE  as Email  info siracertification com    Web  www siracertification com    Sira Certification Service    Rake Lane  Eccleston  Chester  CH4 9JN  England    sira    CERTIFICATION    SCHEDULE    TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE Sira O3ATEX4578  Issue 1    2    4 20 mA printed circuit board    Terminal block TB1  1 2 3   Ui 2 42V  Ti   40 mA  Co   34 nF  Lo   40 mH  Or    The pcb may be replaced by a Spectrum Sensors and Controls Inc  P N 6209 2040 230  1kohm     10   type or P N 6209 2039 130  Skohm    10  type    3 Two proximity switches  Pepperl and Fuchs Type NJ 2 V3 N Y17905  Terminal blo
139. es op  rations suivantes branchement ou  d  branchement d un circuit de puissance  de signalisation ou autre        2 18 September 2012    SD760 Installation       2 5 2 2 Sira Certification Service Special Conditions for Safe Use  See SIRA certificate 03ATEX2577X  Special conditions for safe use are denoted by an    X    after certificate number     2 5 2 3 Supplemental Instructions for ATEX Certified Models    This section provides details concerning the installation  operation  and servicing of ATEX certified equipment   European ATEX Directive 94 9 EC  Annex II  1 0 6  described in this manual  Included at the end of this section  are the Sira certificates and the Declaration of Conformity     IMPORTANT    The product s certifications are listed on its nameplate  Always refer to this nameplate  before installing  operating  or servicing the product     The product s date of manufacture is shown on a label inside the cover  See the  referenced instruction to remove the cover     This section addresses equipment and protective systems intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres  It is  applicable to installations in the European Union  For an installation in an explosive atmosphere in another  location  see other sections in this instruction or contact Siemens  see Section 1 4 Customer Product Support     The following statements apply to equipment covered by certificate numbers Sira 03ATEX2577X and Sira  03ATEX4578     1  The equipment may be used in a hazardous 
140. eumatic output to position a control valve actuator  The 760E  electro pneumatic positioner accepts a 4 20 mA current signal and  converts it to a pneumatic output  They can be used with linear or rotary   single or double acting actuators  Shown at right is a 760 mounted to a  sample linear actuator  A selection of cam profiles and feedback levers   for linear operation  is available  A wide selection of mounting kits is  available to allow mounting the positioner on most valve actuators     A spool valve is used to load the actuator for positioning in response to  an input signal  Mechanical feedback is provided by a characterized cam   Cam profiles are available for linear  equal percentage  or quick opening   operation  Linear action can range from 1 2  to 6  in length        Positioner installation is quite flexible  While the positioner is often  ordered for use with a specific actuator  it can be reconfigured on site for  use with either a linear or rotary actuator  Also  no additional parts are necessary to change between single and  double acting actuators  or between direct and reverse actions  A selection of input shaft kits and feedback kits is  available for Design Level B  positioners  Design Level D positioners feature a universal input shaft which allows  customer selectable external adapters and feedback levers so replacement of the input shaft is not needed when  changing application     Available indicator options include a yellow flat indicator  an red and
141. exhaust connections are 1 4 NPT  Gauge connections are 1 8 NPT     User supplied materials     e Scale free piping at least 1 8  ID for standard flow models and 1 4  ID for high flow models     e 1 4 NPT pipe fitting for each connection  Tighten fittings to 12 ft lb   16 3 Nm  maximum  Do not over tighten     e 1 4  pipe plug to plug the unused port for single acting actuators     Table 2 3 Actuator Fail Position with Loss of Input Signal or Supply Air                                                          Positioner Actuator   Fail Position After Loss Of   C ti T Action  onnection s  ype Input Signal Supply Air  Direct acting  Down to spring   Down to spring  v2 Up Valve moves upward as position position   V1 Plugged  Down input signal increases   Reverse acting  Up Down to spring  v1 Up Valve moves downward as position     V2 Plugged  Down input signal increases   2  2 Cs e Direct acting  Up to spring Up to spring  20  V1 Plugged    Valve moves downward as position position           input signal increases   Down  x ma Reverse acting  Down Up to spring   V2 Plugged  Ke Valve moves upward as position  stk  input signal increases   Down  i Valve moves upward as Down Undetermined  input signal increases     2 Up  Down  i Valve moves downward as Up Undetermined  input signal increases  en V1 Up       Down   2    lt   Q    y Valve moves upward as Down to spring   Down to spring    input signal increases position position  v2 Up  Down  We Valve move downward as Up Up to spring 
142. f CCW Cam Lobe       Note  For clarity  the cam and cam follower bearing are shown without the cam locking  hardware  The cam locking hardware must be loosely installed when indexing a cam     Figure 3 5 Indexing of CW and CCW Cams    8  Ifremoved in Step 5  install the beacon or flat indicator compression washer  extension shaft  and indicator     9  Install the retaining clip as described below           3 4 September 2012    SD760    Cam Indexing and Positioner Calibration       The purpose of the retaining clip is to hold the feedback pin securely against the pressure side of the feedback  lever slot  even at small cam pressure angles  This prevents excessive play in the linkage and limits the amount  of error introduced into the system through the linkage     It may be necessary to separate the feedback pin from the lever to ease installation of a retaining clip     Design Levels A and B    1   2     3     Note whether the CW or CCW cam lobe is being used  see step 7 above     Figure 3 6 shows two clip positions in details A and B  Select the position that  1  provides consistent  retaining action as the feedback pin moves in the slot and 2  locates the clip where it does not interfere with  nearby parts     e CW Cam Lobe  Figure 3 6 detail A shows the correct installation of the retaining clip for pressure on  the upward side of the feedback lever slot     e CCW Cam Lobe  Figure 3 6B shows the same for the downward side of the slot     With the lever at mid stroke  adju
143. f the complete control range                    Positioner    Output  Control     Input       a E  Signal                Positioner  Output    MG00608a    As an example  in the above figure  Valve System 1 operates from the fully closed position to its fully open position  when the control signal goes from 4 mA to 12 mA  or 3 psig to 9 psig   Valve System 2 remains closed during this  first portion of the control range  opening only when the control signal reaches 12 mA  or 9 psig   It continues to  open to its full position when the control signal reaches 20 mA  or 15 psig   Reverse action is also possible on one  or both of these devices        3 8 September 2012    SD760 Cam Indexing and Positioner Calibration       Since the valve systems operate independently  what control ranges are possible  As stated in the Section 1 1  Specifications  the    ZERO    setting is adjustable between  10  to  60  of normal control range  and the    SPAN     setting is adjustable between  60  to  25  of normal control range  The normal span is 12 psig  for a pneumatic  positioner  or 16 mA  for an electro pneumatic positioner   span being the difference between the lowest and  highest control signals  As shown in the figure below  this means the    ZERO    can be set as low as 2 4 mA  or 1 8  psig   or as high as 13 6 mA  or 10 2 psig      SPAN    can be set as low as 10 4 mA  or 4 8 psig  and as high as 24  mA  or 19 psig   The only restriction is that  in any valve system  the    ZERO   
144. fbescheinigung darf nur unver  ndert weiterverbreitet werden   Ausz  ge oder Anderungen bed  rfen der Genehmigung der Physikalisch Technischen Bundesanstalt     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt    Bundesallee 100   D 38116 Braunschweig    Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt    Braunschweig und Berlin    4  Erganzung zur EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X    NJ AEN             NJ 6 F N    NJ 10 F N         haa  NJ 15 U 4N               NJ 15 M1  N            NJ 20 U  N                        NJ 30P U  1N    IIB IIC IIC  NJ 40     N                NJ 50 FP N    IA IIB IIC                5  Bei den folgenden Typen der quaderf  rmigen induktiven Sensoren ist die unzul  ssige  elektrostatische Aufladung der Metallgeh  useteile zu vermeiden  Gef  hrliche elektrostatische  Aufladungen der Metallgeh  useteile k  nnen durch Erdung dieser Metallgeh  useteile vermieden  werden  wobei sehr kleine Metallgeh  useteile  z B  Schrauben  nicht geerdet werden m  ssen     FJ 6 110 N    NCN30 U4 4N0     FJ 7       NCNA0 L2 NO     NCB15 U3 N0    NCN40 U3 N0     NCB15 U4 N0    NCN40 U4 N0     NCB20 L2 NO    NCN50 FP NO P3     NCB40 FP NO P3    NCNS50 FP NO PA     NCB40 FP NO P4    NJ 15 U3 N     NCN20 U3 N0    NJ 15 04        NCN20 U4 N0    NJ 15 M1 N V  NCN30 U3 N0    NJ 20 03          Pr  fbericht  PTB Ex 06 25344        Meyer        Dr  Ing  U  Johann         Direktor und Professor      Mie    NJ 20 04        NJ 30 U3 N     NJ 30 U4 N     NJ 30P U3 1N     NJ 30P U4 1N     
145. ge of travel  If proper limit switch actuation is not occurring   loosen the switch mounting screws and reposition the switches toward the input shaft     Wiring  Mechanical Limit Switches  Refer to Table 4 1  Figure 4 3  and Control Drawing 15032 7602  at the end of Section 2  and connect the two    switches to external devices or barriers as needed for the required degree of protection  For mechanical limit switch  electrical ratings  refer to Table 1 1            2 1  2  3 4    Figure 4 3 TB2 Terminals    4 1 2 2 Proximity Sensor Limit Switches    Proximity limit switches must be used in conjunction with a switch transfer barrier  The barrier provides either dual  transistor outputs or dual relay outputs depending on the model  In order to comply with intrinsic safety approvals   the Pepperl   Fuchs   proximity switches must be used with an approved Pepperl   Fuchs switch transfer barrier   Refer to Control Drawing 15032 7602  at the end of Section 2  for approved barriers  specifications and wiring  diagrams     Wiring  Proximity Sensors    Follow Control Drawing 15032 7602 and the instructions supplied with the barrier and for correct wiring of the  Proximity Sensors to the barrier  Terminal connections are listed in Table 4 1 and shown in Figure 4 3     A CAUTION    The proximity sensors are not intended to carry a load current   DO NOT WIRE  SENSORS DIRECTLY TO ASSOCIATED APPARATUS                    Calibration  Proximity Sensors    1  After wiring the switches  apply
146. he actuator stem  a feedback lever attached to the positioner input shaft  and a feedback pin  fastened to either the feedback lever or the slotted bracket  See Figures 2 4  2 7  and 2 8     e The feedback linkage must be rigid and motion must be transferred from the actuator to the positioner input  shaft without deflection or hysteresis     e Figure 2 7  details A and B  show the feedback pin fixed to the slotted bracket  the preferred method  The  distance from the centerline of the feedback pin to the centerline of the input shaft must equal 0 866 x  actuator stroke     e Figure 2 7  detail C  shows the feedback pin fixed to the feedback lever  This is an alternate method that  causes an increase in linearity error of approximately 2   The distance from the centerline of the feedback  pin to the centerline of the positioner input shaft must equal actuator stroke     e With the positioner mounted on the actuator  pneumatic ports must be accessible for piping and electrical  conduit connections must be accessible for wiring  allow space for conduit runs  Remove plastic pipe plugs  just prior to piping and installing conduit     One Piece Input Shaft and  Feedback Lever     Lever has  Slot for 1 4    Diameter  Feedback Pin pem   Design Levels A and B         Universal Input Shaft with  Separate Linear Adapter    and Feedback Lever      Lever has Slot for 5 16  P  i  Diameter Feedback Pin    Design Level D e    Universal Input Shaft         Linear Adapter    MH00559a    Figur
147. hten the extension shaft until the compression washer is  completely flat  See Figure 4 2 and the exploded view drawing is in the Parts List section     Mechanical or Proximity Limit Switch option kit     Install two limit switch actuator cams  see Figure 4 2     1  Ifa beacon indicator or flat indicator is installed  remove the indicator from the extension shaft  A beacon  indicator can be pulled axially off the extension shaft  the flat indicator is secured with a single screw     2  Foreach actuator cam  pinch together the two tabs and slide the actuator cam onto the extension shaft until  it aligns with a limit or proximity switch     3  If removed above  install the indicator  The indicator can be aligned during option calibration     Install the green ground screw and washer  the enclosure earth ground wire clamp  and  as needed  the I P wire  clamp  see Figures 4 1  4 2 and 4 11     Go to Section 4 1 2 Calibration and Wiring of PC Board Based Options  Perform the steps for the option kit being  installed     4 1 2 Calibration and Wiring of PC Board Based Options    In the following subsections  locate the feedback or limit switch option being installed     Refer to Section 2 5 Electrical Connections when installing in a hazardous location  All wiring must be in  accordance with applicable national and local electrical codes for the intended electrical circuit load        A WARNING      9 Electrical shock hazard             Hazardous voltage can cause death or serious i
148. icates may be circulated  only without alteration  Extracts or alterations are subject to approval by the Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt    Bundesallee 100 e 38116 Braunschweig    GERMANY    in case of dispute  the German text shall prevail        Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt  Braunschweig und Berlin  5  SUPPLEMENT TO EC TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X                                          NJ 2 V N         een       NJ_3 V3 N           eo DEE        ee  oe      NJ 10 F N    ale    an   NJ 15 U  N     NJ 15 M1  N     ue ce ese  NJ 20 U  N                  IC        C      NJ 30P U  1N          5  Inadmissible electrostatic charge of parts of the metal housing has to be avoided for the following  types of cuboidal inductive sensors  Dangerous electrostatic charge of parts of the metal housing  can be avoided by grounding these parts whereas very small parts of the metal housing  e g   screws  do not need to be grounded     FJ 6 110 N    NCB40 FP NO P3    NJ 15 M1 N V  FJ 7 N   NCB40 FP NO P4    NJ 20 U3 N     NBB15 U3K NO    NCN20 U3 NO    NJ 20 U44N     NBB15 U4K NO    NCN20 U4 N0    NJ 30 U3 N     NBB20 U3K NO    NCN30 U3 N0    NJ 30 U4 N     NBB20 U4K NO    NCN30 U4 NO    NJ 30P U3 1N     NBN30 U3K NO    NCN40 L2 NO    NJ 30P U4 1N     NBN30 U4K NO    NCN40 U3 N0    NJ 40 U34N     NBN40 U3K NO    NCN40 U4 N0    NJ 40 U4 N     NBN40 U4K NO    NCN50 FP NO P3    NJ 50 FP N P3     NCB15 U3 NO    NCN50 F
149. igensichere Stromkreise    H  chstwerte     Typ 1 Typ 2 Typ 3 Typ 4    U    16V U    16V U    16V U  16V  i jo                25        1 25        1  52        liz 76 mA        34 mW        64 mW        169 mW  P    242 mW    Beim Einsatz als Kategorie 1 Ger  t ist zu beachten  dass der  Auswerte  und Versorgungsstromkreis der Z  ndschutzart  Eigensicherheit Ex ia IIC IIB entsprechen muss        Die Zusammenhange zwischen dem Typ des angeschlossenen Stromkreises  der h  chstzul  ssigen  Umgebungstemperatur f  r den Einsatz als Kategorie 1  bzw  Kategorie 2 Ger  t und der Temperatur   klasse sowie den wirksamen inneren Reaktanzen f  r die einzelnen Typen der quaderf  rmigen  induktiven Sensoren sind den nachfolgenden Tabellen zu entnehmen     Seite 2 7             U T a REDE       EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigungen ohne Unterschrift und ohne Siegel haben keine G  ltigkeit   Diese EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung darf nur unver  ndert weiterverbreitet werden   Ausz  ge oder Anderungen bed  rfen der Genehmigung der Physikalisch Technischen Bundesanstalt     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt     Bundesallee 100     D 38116 Braunschweig              v        c      o             5  eo             A  c  c                      A         m   gt                        ta                      3      o  o  c  3      29    n     gt  lt   N  e  e  N   gt  lt       ko   lt   e  e  tn     n   o  E                lt    o  o      Q          Dei   gt                      o  3      3          
150. inal connections for the intended use  For example  if resistance is  to increase with clockwise input shaft rotation  Direct CW   connect to terminals V1 and V2        4 8 September 2012    SD760 Option Kit Installation       Table 4 3 Connections for 1K Q Feedback Option    Direction of Input Shaft Travel  CW V1  V2  W    CCW V2  V3     V2        CCW V1  V2       4 2 INDICATOR KITS    There are several indicator kits  a beacon indicator kit and three flat indicator kits  for 60 degree  75 degree and 90   degree rotation  To field install a kit  refer to the Kit Installation Instruction supplied with the kit  The following  procedures are intended to support re installing the indicator after indexing the cam and calibrating the positioner     4 2 1 Beacon Indicator       Shaft Extension on Input Shaft  Compression Washer    Beacon Indicator       Figure 4 9 Beacon Indicator    Perform the procedure below to re install the Beacon Indicator after a positioner has been calibrated  See Figure 4   9     1  Place the compression washer onto the 1 4 20 male threads of the input shaft  Thread the extension shaft onto  the input shaft  Tighten the extension shaft until the compression washer is completely flat     2  Carefully press the indicator onto the top of the extension shaft  Be sure that the snap ring inside the indicator  remains in position     Apply the minimum input signal  3 psi or 4 mA  to the valve positioner   Rotate the indicator to display the appropriate text when 
151. ination certificate valid in your country     The device may be operated with high pressure and corrosive media  Therefore  serious injury and or considerable  material damage cannot be ruled out in the event of handling of the device     The perfect and safe operation of the equipment is conditional upon proper transport  proper storage  installation  and assembly  as well as  on careful operation and commissioning     The equipment may be used only for the purposes specified in this manual        CAUTION          circuits and transistors  The symbol at right appears on a circuit board or other electronic assembly to    Electrostatic discharge can damage or cause the failure of semiconductor devices such as integrated e  indicate that special handling precautions are needed     e    properly grounded conductive wrist strap must be worn whenever an electronics module or circuit board is  handled or touched  A service kit with a wrist strap and static dissipative mat is available from most electronics  supply companies     e Electronic assemblies must be stored in static protective bags when not installed in equipment        vi January 2012    SD760 Introduction       1 0 INTRODUCTION    The ValvePAC    Series 760 valve positioners are available in pneumatic  and electro pneumatic models  760P and 760E respectively  Both are cam  characterized  double acting valve positioners  The 760P pneumatic  positioner accepts a 3 15 psig or 3 27 psig input signal and converts it to  a pn
152. indsor  Berkshire  UK  SL4 1RS       44  0  1753 750 000 F   44  0  1753 868 700 E mail  atex fmapprovals com www fmalobal com    FM F ATEX 020  Feb 07  Page 4 of 4    1 TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE    2 Equipment or Protective systems intended for use in Potentially  Explosive Atmospheres   Directive 94 9 EC    3 Type Examination Certificate No  FMO7ATEX0003X     Equipment or protective system  T 590 AabK I P Converter   Type Reference and Name    5 Name of Applicant  ControlAir Inc    6 Address of Applicant  8 Columbia Drive    Amherst  NH 03031 USA    7 This equipment or protective system and any acceptable variation thereto is specified in the schedule to this  certificate and documents therein referred to     8 FM Approvals Ltd  certifies that this equipment has been found to comply with the Essential Health and  Safety Requirements relating to the design and construction of equipment intended for use in potentially  explosive atmospheres given in Annex Il to the Directive    The examination and test results are recorded in confidential report number 3030620EC dated 15  June  2007    9 Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements  with the exception of those identified in  item 15 of the schedule to this certificate  has been assessed by compliance with the following documents   EN 60079 0 2006 and EN 60079 15 2005    10 Ifthe sign    X    is placed after the certificate number  it indicates that the equipment is subject to special  conditions for safe us
153. interconnection of nonincendive circuits with a nonincendive source when the approved  values of Voc and Isc of the nonincendive source are less than or equal to Vmax and Imax of the nonincendive circuit and the  approved values of Ca and La for the nonincendive source are greater than Ci   Ccable and Li   Lcable  respectively  for the  nonincendive circuit     All Nonincendive sources must be approved              Sensors using V93  V94 V95 connectors   mini  7 8   with the locking clamp  P F model V9 CL D2  and V1  V12 connectors with  locking clamp  P  amp  F model V1 Clip  are suitable to be mounted outside the protective enclosure  Wiring methods must be in  accordance to the National Electrical Code  ANSI NFPA 70           NJa b c d e  Inductive Cylinder Position Sensor is suitable for Class    Div 2 only   NI I 2 ABCD T5 Ta 50  C     1 5  2  3    b C  D  F  PD  FD1  QUT     EX  c US  E02  E2  EO TABLE 2   EXCEPTIONS    d any diameter MODEL NUMBER RESTRICTION    ezV1  V12  V93  V94  V95 connectors NBN3 F25 E8 Do not use in a Class II  Division 1  Group E  NEMA 4X Hazardous Location    TABLE 1   NONINCENDIVE PARAMETERS  8  V9 CL D2  amp  Vi Clip   Not Approved for use in Class Il or Ill locations  Deme  ven  met  es  um    Certification Status     Agency      Pending      NJ type SENSOR cl I  Div 2 ONLY   See i 00   NJ2 FD1 type SENSOR   Class I  Div 2 ONLY   Ta   85C  T4A   See Note 11                   m   m ee    en       m            Dieses Dokument enthalt sicherhei
154. ion    SD760       Feedback Lever with 1 4  Slot       fen  X Si           ww Diameter  I Feedback Pin  CW Cam       A  CW Cam Lobe  Upward Pin Pressure  Mounting Positions       Retaining Clip       CCW Cam   Ae  Lobe              CCW Cam Lobe  Downward Pin Pressure  Mounting Positions       30 00   with 60   Cam    MG00607a  16300 12r5       Cm  Gl       MS Mid stroke       Position    Slide Area    C  Feedback Pin Slide Area    Figure 3 6 Retaining Clip Position  Design Levels A and B        5 16  Feedback    i Feedback Pin  Feedback Slide Area  Lever  Retaining Clip    CW Cam  Lobe    Linear Adapter    A  CW Cam Lobe  Upward Pin Pressure  Mounting Position    Retaining Clip          5 16  Feedback  Pin    CCW Cam  Lobe    Feedback  Lever    MA00606a  16300 1573_4r1      Linear Adapter    B  CCW Cam Lobe  Downward Pin Pressure  Mounting Position          Figure 3 7 Retaining Clip Position  Design Level D       3 6    September 2012    SD760 Cam Indexing and Positioner Calibration       3 3 CALIBRATION    See Figure 3 8 for the location of the zero and span calibration adjustments     IMPORTANT    Calibrate the positioner by adjusting only the zero and span screws shown in Figure 3   8  Model 760E  Do not adjust the factory set I P calibration screws shown in Figure 4   10     While calibrating the positioner  ensure that     e Linear action     The positioner feedback lever is approximately perpendicular to the valve stem at the 50   stroke position  Adjust positioner loca
155. ion 1  Group E  F  G  for models 22 06 66     22 06 67  22 06 68  22 06 69 only     An approved seal must be used at the enclosure conduit  opening to maintain Intrinsic Safe circuit integrity           No revision can be made without FM notification    Uber 6   Uber 30    ber 120  Uber         Waris          nach DIN 6706 Allgemeintoleranzen E bis 30 bis 400   406     e   ohne Angaben  _y  e   Technische Oberfl  che   nach DIN ISO 1302   SS E REES      1953          Name      Denn Connection Diagram         P Converter 22 06 a  900842 FM    1             EE EE EE ICM EE TEE    ABB Automation Products    A  Control Document No  900842  FM Approved for  P Converter Type 22 06 a  Hazardous Area Nonhazardous   rea  Class   Division 1 Groups A  B  C  D     R2 wor                             Intrinsically safe circuit  Vmax   40 V  Imax   125 mA  Ci  0  Li z 1 mH        A 02 ZA D3 A       encapsulated coil  at least 185 R    black         P Converter FM Approved    Safety barrier       Note  Location is allowed in Class Il  Ill   D Division 1  Group E  F  G  for models 22 06 66   22 06 67  22 06 68  22 06 69 only        01   03 An approved seal must be used at the enclosure conduit  1N5343B or comparable type opening to maintain Intrinsic Safe circuit integrity     k    n There T  ber Sol   ber 1207   ber  20 004  mA re nach      678 Aligemelntoteranzen   P5 6   FRESE   berto        50       m m    sn Tin   Se sf on          Entity  Imax   125 mA  Ri according label    Vorschrift 
156. ion that should be taken to avoid an undesirable result or state   Note Identifies additional information that should be read        Electrical shock hazard  The included Warning text states that the danger of  electrical shock is present        i Electrical shock hazard  Indicated that the danger of electrical shock is present        Explosion hazard  Indicates that the danger of an explosion hazard exists        Electrostatic discharge  The presence of this symbol indicates that electrostatic  discharge can damage the electronic assembly              Pinch hazard  Indicates that a pinch hazard exists if correct procedures are not  followed              Qualified Persons    The described equipment should be installed  configured  operated  and serviced only by qualified persons  thoroughly familiar with this manual  A copy of this manual  on the Process Instrumentation User Manual CD   accompanies the equipment  The current version of the manual  in Portable Document Format  PDF   can be  downloaded from the Siemens Internet site  see the Customer Product Support section of this manual     For the purpose of this manual and product labels  a qualified person is one who is familiar with the installation   assembly  commissioning  and operation of the product  and who has the appropriate qualifications for their  activities such as        September 2012 v    Preface SD760       e Training  instruction  or authorization to operate and maintain devices systems according to the s
157. irements     Filter screens at the pneumatic ports may require periodic replacement  The frequency of cleaning is dependent  upon the quality of instrument air used     The end user should perform periodic functionality tests of the positioner in accordance with the critical nature of  the application     Explosion Hazardous   Hazard  Voltage  Pinch  Can cause Can cause Hazard   death or death or   serious injury  serious injury   Remove supply    pressure before  Install in accordance with Disconnect power before servicing   15032 7602 or appropriate servicing equipment   certification   Remove power before Do not exceed  servicing  actuator maximum  Do not substitute pressure rating   components or modify Never exceed  equipment  150 psig supply        5 1 FILTER SCREENS    Filter screens are located in the V1  V2  and supply ports  Refer to the Parts List section for the filter screen part  number     1  Turn air supply off  Disconnect piping   2  Remove a screen with a scribe by carefully pulling on and around the edge of a screen     3  Using a piece of stiff  hollow tubing approximately 1 4  in diameter  insert each new screen until it bottoms  Do  not insert the screen using the eraser end of a pencil or a length of solid rod as they can distort the factory   shaped screen  possibly reducing maximum flow     4  Connect piping and check for leaks     5 2 FEEDBACK LEVER AND FEEDBACK PIN COMPATIBILITY  Linear Action Only     To successfully replace an installed design lev
158. ision 2 Installation   Ungrounded Circuit Two  Barriers    Safe Area Hazardous Area   see sheet 1 for details     Power Supply  24 V max    O       o Indicator             relay  etc   TB2 1  Lower Switch     TB2 5  Upper Switch      Indicator          relay  etc      Note that connection is made to all  three terminals for Limit Switch  1   Lower Switch  and Limit Switch  2   Upper Switch  in this configuration     Limit Switch  1 Limit Switch  2   Lower Switch   Upper Switch   Circuit Circuit    Barrier  1 must be CSA Certified and FM Approved dual channel Shunt Diode Zener Barrier  with output safety parameters  as follows     Voc Channel 1   earth  lt  28V  Isc Channel 1      0 093A  Voc Channel 2   earth  lt  28V  Isc Channel 2  Diode return     CSA Certified and FM Approved MTL 787 Dual Channel Barrier is recommended     Notes continued on next sheet     Details Approved Title    J  Sweeney Control Drawing for    J  Sweeney e  J  Sweeney Series 760 Valve Controller    19 May 08   Minor correction pg 13   J  Sweeney    22 June 11 Correct pg 12  add SII J  Sweeney  Siemens Industry  Inc   Spring House PA  USA 19477 15032 7602 Sheet 10 of 13    Drawing No        Barrier  2 must be CSA Certified and FM Approved ground referenced Barrier with output  safety parameters  as follows     Voc  lt  28V  channel to earth  Isc  Diode return    CSA Certified and FM Approved MTL 786 Diode Return Barrier is recommended    Barrier  1 and Barrier  2 must be of the same polarity  either b
159. itation Parameters specified below  The circuitry for the T590 is contained on a  single printed circuit board that is mounted to the transducer s drive coil on the aluminium manifold  and covered with a plastic cover  The I P Converter is intended to be installed within an additional  enclosure     T590 AabK  I P Converter   Ex nL version   3G ExnL IC T  Ta    55  C to Ta max   a   Output Pressure  C  D  E   b   Connection  M  P    Energy Limitation Parameters                         _ Temperature class              Ti Tu   T5   70  C  T5   85  C  T6 60 C   50mA         425V                55 C   60mA       388V      T590 AabK  I P Converter   Ex nAnL version          ExnAnL IIC T6 Ta    55  C to  85  C   a   Output Pressure  C  D  E   b   Connection  M  P    Input parameters  Ui  40 V   liz 20 mA    14 Special Conditions for Safe Use     1  The non metallic cover of the I P converter is considered to constitute an electrostatic  discharge hazard  Clean only with a damp cloth    2  The I P converter enclosure s metal base must be mounted as          of a bonded  structure    3  The I P converter enclosure contains aluminium and is considered to constitute a  potential risk of ignition by impact or friction and must be taken into account during  installation    4  If the T590 I P Converter is installed as Category 3 equipment  then it shall be installed in    an Enclosure which maintains an ingress protection rating of IP54 and meets the  enclosure requirements of EN 50014 or
160. ithout alteration  Extracts or alterations are subject to approval by the Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt   In case of dispute  the German text shall prevail     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt   Bundesallee 100     38116 Braunschweig  Germany          Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt D B    Braunschweig und Berlin    3  SUPPLEMENT TO EC TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X    For relationship of the type of connected circuit  the maximum permissible ambient temperature for  application  as category 2 equipment  and the temperature class as well as the effective internal  reactances for this type of cuboidal inductive sensor  reference is made to the following table       type 1   type 2 L type 3 type4      type Maximum permissible ambient temperature in   C for application in  Ci Li temperature class     nF     uH           T5   T4    T6   T5     T1    NJ 3 V3 N      40   so   73   ss   100   66   81   100                                Test report  PTB Ex 04 23369    Braunschweig  February 26  2004       Sheet 2 2          EC type examination Certificates without signature and official stamp shall not be valid  The certificates may be circulated    only without alteration  Extracts or alterations are subject to approval by the Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt   In case of dispute  the German text shall prevail     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt   Bundesallee 100   38116 Braunschweig  Germany             Physikalisch Technische Bundesa
161. least a degree of protection of IP20 according to IEC publication  60529 1989 is met     3  The assignment of the type of the connected circuit to the maximum permissible ambient  temperature and the temperature class as well as the effective internal reactances for the  individual types of cuboidal inductive sensors is shown in the table given under item  15  of  this EC type examination certifcate     4  With the application in group IIC inadmissible electrostatic charge of the plastic housing has  to be avoided for following types of cuboidal inductive sensors  warning label on the device      NCB40 FP NO    NJ 30P U    1N     NCNAO U    NO    NJ 40 U    N     NCN5O FP NO    NJ 50 FP N       5  Inadmissible electrostatic charge of parts of the metal housing has to be avoided for the  following types of cuboidal inductive sensors  Dangerous electrostatic charges of parts of the  metal housing can be avoided by grounding of these parts whereas very small parts of the  metal housing  e g  screws  don t need to be grounded     FJ 6 110 N    NCN30 U4 N0    NJ 20 U4 N     FJ 7 N    NCN40 U3 N0    NJ 30 U3 N     NCB15 U3 N0    NCN40 U4 N0    NJ 30 UA N     NCB15 U4 N0    NCNSO FP NO P3    NJ 30P U3 1N     NCB40 FP NO P3    NCNSO FP NO P4    NJ 30P U4 1N     NCB40 FP NO P4    NJ 15 U3 N    NJ 40 U3 N     NCN20 US NO    NJ 15 U44N    NJ 40 04        NCN20 U4  NO    NJ 15 M1 N V NJ 50 FP N P3     NCN30 U3 N0    NJ 20 U3 N    NJ 50 FP N P4        18  Essential health and safety requi
162. lt    Bundesallee 100 e D 38116 Braunschweig       Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt PIB    Braunschweig und Berlin    1  Erg  nzung zur EG Baumusterpriifbescheinigung PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X    H  chstwerte     Typ 1 Typ2 Typ 3 Typ 4  U   16V U    16V U   16V U    16V       25           25          52        1  76 mA          34 mW        64 mW        169 mW        242 mW       Der Zusammenhang zwischen dem Typ des angeschlossenen Stromkreises  der h  chstzul  ssigen  Umgebungstemperatur und der Temperaturklasse sowie den wirksamen inneren Reaktanzen f  r die  neuen Typen der quaderf  rmigen induktiven Sensoren ist der Tabelle zu entnehmen              Temperaturklasse                              T1 T1 T1 T1    100      100         Typen       T5  NCN2 F56 N1     100   100   75   90   100  70   85  100  55   70   87             _  NBN4 V3 NO         100  66   81   100  45   60   89   30   45   74         Pr  fbericht         Ex 01 20124    Braunschweig  23  August 2001       Dr  Ing  U  Johannsmeyer  Regierungsdirektor       Seite 2 2    EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigungen ohne Unterschrift und ohne Siegel haben keine G  ltigkeit   Diese EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung darf nur unverandert weiterverbreitet werden   Ausz  ge oder Anderungen bed  rfen der Genehmigung der Physikalisch Technischen Bundesanstalt     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt    Bundesallee 100 e D 38116 Braunschweig    Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt PIB    Braunschweig und Berlin    2  ERGANZUNG  g
163. ly CIFGUIL   ee type of protection Intrinsic Safety Ex ia             resp  Ex ib IIC IIB    only for connection to certified intrinsically safe circuits  maximum values     type 1 type 2 type 3 type 4    Uj   16V U    16V U    16V U    16V  l   25 mA l   25 mA li   52 mA    76 mA  P  34mW   P    64 mW        169 mW       242 mW    For the application as category 1 equipment the evaluation and  supply circuit must correspond to type of protection Intrinsic  Safety Ex ia IIC IIB     For relationship between type of the connected circuit  maximum permissible ambient temperature for    application as category 1 resp  category 2 equipment and temperature class as well as the effective  internal reactances for the individual types of cuboidal inductive sensors  reference is made to the    following tables                     Sheet 2 7                    EC type examination Certificates without signature and official stamp shall not be valid  The certificates may be circulated  only without alteration  Extracts or alterations are subject to approval by the Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt   In case of dispute  the German text shall prevail     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt     Bundesallee 100 e 38116 Braunschweig   GERMANY       Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt    Braunschweig und Berlin    5  SUPPLEMENT TO EC TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X          x  53  53                1                             sae      ee eo    OO         sies  xp fC 10 
164. maximum actuator and valve positioner air pressures stated in the  manufacturer   s literature  Exceeding these ratings could cause personal injury or  equipment damage     Apply an input signal  e g   4 mA or 3 psig  and set it to zero      Loosen the zero lock screw  Turn the zero adjustment screw    gt 0 lt    to achieve desired valve position   Tighten zero lock screw    Set the input to 100   e g   20 mA or 15 psig      Loosen the span lock screw  Turn the span adjustment screw     lt   gt     until the valve is at the desired position     SO  po            US we    Tighten span lock screw   10  Set the input to zero    Verify that the zero has not changed  Adjust as necessary     11  Remove supply air and all electrical power from the positioner  If removed to index the cam  install removed  indicator and PC board based option  Refer to Section 4 Option Kit Installation as necessary     12  Install positioner cover and tighten the screws to 20 Ib in  2 3 N m      3 4 SPLIT RANGING    Split ranging allows a single control signal to be used to position two valve systems  As shown below  the common  control signal is connected to 2 positioners  This signal may be pneumatic  3     15 psig  or electronic  4     20 mA    Each positioner is connected to a valve or other device  Although both valve systems use the common input  each  system operates independently  Typically  each system will have a unique positioner calibration since each will  operate over a specific portion o
165. may be present     1        of the following I P converters can be fitted     a  ABB  formally Hartmann  amp  Braun GmbH  I P Converter  Certificate  TUV 99ATEX1487X   coded EEx ia IIC T6 T5 T4  Tamb  range    55 to  85  C   II 2G    b  ControlAir Inc  I P Converter  Certificate  FM 07ATEX0002X  coded EEx ia IIC T6 T5 T4   Tamb  range    55 to  85  C   II 1G     2    4 20mA printed circuit board or the PCB may be replaced by a Spectrum Sensors and Controls  Inc  P N 6209 2040 230  1kohm    10   type or P N 6209 2039 130  Skohm    10  type      3 Two proximity switches  Pepperl and Fuchs Type NJ 2 V3 N  Type 4   PTB OOATEX2032X  coded  EEx ia IIC T4 T5 T6  Tamb range    20 to   74  C  or two simple limit switches may be used   Tamb    40 to  85  C   these switches are rated at 0 5A  125V dc     The applicable safety descriptions are defined in section 15 1   Variation 1   This variation introduced the following changes     L A number of drawing changes were recognised  in addition  alternative and replacement  component devices were introduced  the product description has therefore been amended and the  special conditions for safe use have also been modified     This certificate and its schedules may only be  reproduced in its entirety and without change  Sira Certification Service  Rake Lane  Eccleston  Chester  CH4 9JN  England    Tel   44  0  1244 670900  F 9400 I 1 Pages Bras Fax   44  0  1244 681330  ES  Mis Email  info siracertification com    Web  www siracertification 
166. mbient     Details Approved Title    J  Sweeney Control Drawing for    J  Sweeney e  J  Sweeney Series 760 Valve Controller    19 May 08   Minor correction pg 13   J  Sweeney    22 June 11 Correct pg 12  add SII J  Sweeney  Siemens Industry  Inc   Spring House PA  USA 19477 15032 7602 Sheet 1 of 13    Drawing No        Temperature Code and Ambient Temperature Range for Series  760 Valve Controller    Determine the options that have been installed in your Series 760 Valve Controller by checking the label that  is under the cover  Compare the option s  installed to Table 1 to determine Model 760 Temperature Code  and Ambient Temperature Range     Table 1  Determination of Temperature Code and Permissible Ambient Temperature Rang  Option or Combination of Options  Temperature   Ambient   Code Temperature   Rang   4 20 mA Feedback Option  40  C to  85  C  4 20 mA Feedback and Limit Switch  1 and  2  40  C to  85  C  4 20 mA Feedback and Proximity Switch  1 and  2  25  C to  85  C  4 20 mA Feedback and I P Module  40  C to  75  C  4 20 mA Feedback and Limit Switch  1 and  2 and I P Module  40  C to  75  C  4 20 mA Feedback and Proximity Switch  1 and  2 and I P  25  C to  75  C  Module  Potentiometer Option  40  C to  85  C  Potentiometer and Limit Switch  1 and  2  40  C to  85  C  Potentiometer and Proximity Switch  1 and  2  25  C to  85  C  Potentiometer and I P Module  40  C to  75  C  Potentiometer and Limit Switch  1 and  2 and I P Module  40  C to  75  C  Potentiometer and
167. mit switches T5 Ui   30 V  Ii   400 mA  Pi   1 3 W   lt 80  C Limit switches T6 Ui   30 V  Ii   400 mA  Pi   1 3 W        gt 45   lt 74      Proximity switches T4 Ui   16 V  Ii   76 mA  Pi   242 mW  Ci   40 nF  Li   50        gt 30   lt 45  C   Proximity switches T5 Ui   16 V  Ii   76 mA  Pi   242 mW  Ci   40 nF  Li   50        lt 30  C Proximity switches T6 Ui   16 V  Ii   76 mA  Pi   242 mW  Ci   40 nF  Li   50         16 ESSENTIAL HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS OF ANNEX II  EHSRs     The relevant EHSRs that are not addressed by the standards listed in this certificate have been  identified and individually assessed in the reports listed in Section 14 2     17 CONDITIONS OF CERTIFICATION  17 1 The use of this certificate is subject to the Regulations Applicable to Holders of Gira Certificates                             17 2 Holders of EC type examination certificates are required to comply with the production control  requirements defined in Article 8 of directive 94 9 EC     This certificate and its schedules may only be    reproduced in its entirety and without change  Sira Certification Service  Rake Lane  Eccleston  Chester  CH4 9JN  England    Tel   44  0  1244 670900  Page 4 of 4 Fax   44  0  1244 681330  Email  info siracertification com    Web  www siracertification com    Form 9400           1    Certificate Annexe    Certificate Number  Sira 03ATEX2577X    sira       Equipment  Series 760 Valve Controllers  Applicant  Siemens Energy and Automation Inc  CERTIFICAT
168. n Service    Rake Lane  Eccleston  Chester  CH4 9JN  England    Page 1 of 4    Form 9402 Issue 1 Tel   44  0  1244 670900    Fax   44  0  1244 681330  Email  info siracertification com    Web  www siracertification com    13    sira    CERTIFICATION    SCHEDULE    TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE Sira             4578  Issue 1    DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT    The Series 760E and 760P Valve Controllers are designed to be mounted on a valve to drive an  actuator that positions the valve in proportion to an electrical input signal  they also feed back the valve  position and line pressure information to control circuitry located in a non hazardous area  They  comprise a number of separate parts housed within a metal enclosure that can be fitted with an  optional transparent    Lexan    dome that permits a valve position indicator to be viewed  External  electrical connections are made to the terminal blocks via a threaded entry that accommodates conduit  or cable  A number of other threaded entries permit the pneumatic connections     The Model 760E has the I P converter fitted and the Model 760P does not     The Valve Controllers are intended to be configured so that all or some of the separate parts  listed as  items 1  2  and 3 below  may be present     The separate parts are as follows   1 One of the following I P converters can be fitted   a  ABB  formerly Hartmann  amp  Braun GmbH  I P Converter  TUV 99ATEX1487X   I P Converter terminals  I    120 mA  b  ControlAir Inc  I P Conv
169. n nne nen 4 4  4 1 2 1 Mechanical Limit Switches        enne tnn 4 4  4 1 2 2 Proximity Sensor Limit SWitehe Sen neen eere 4 5  4 1 2 3 4 20 mAdc Current Feedback Board Option sese 4 6  4 1 2 4 1K Q Potentiometer Feedback Option nennen 4 8  A 2 INDIGATOR KITS   dite RERO EURO COBRE LOG D DI T 4 9  4 2     Beacon  Indicator    ttes TD a RE BR UN D er te      4 9  4 22  Flat Indicator     e Re e ea Ru se a Rete diets 4 10  4 3 INPUT SHAFT KITS FOR DESIGN LEVELS    ANDRE 4 10  A 45D P ZERANSDUGER KIT               trono eese teque eie toe ned e e entree    4 11  4 5 OUTPUT CAPACITY SPOOL KIT    4 12  4 6 MODEL 750 ADAPTER PLATE KIT                          eene eene eene nennen tnnt            4 13  S 0LMAINTENANGE                                  va cosbessoscescesecess os EVER ea eee va nope ea          5 1  SA EIETER            on a este er te e Re b ere        eet ne e bee eia 5 1  5 2 FEEDBACK LEVER AND FEEDBACK PIN COMPATIBILITY  Linear Action Only                           5 1       September 2012 i    Contents SD760       5 3    SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS              rie SEENEN 5 2  5 3 1 Input Shaft Replacement  Design Level A or Bi    5 2  5 3 2 UP Transducer Filter Replacement                   sese ener 5 3   SA RETURN  FOR REPAIR    rrr ote BR Rn ena eis 5 3    PARTS LIST AND EXPLODED VIEW DRAWING    LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS    FIGURE PAGE  1 1 Positioner  Labels  Inside Cover  e Rede eG SPI 1 4  1 2   Approvals EC 1 4  2 1 Installation Dimensions  Design Levels    a
170. n ordering     3  Refer to Table 1 5 in SD760 either to order kits to upgrade or service a positioner or to order most individual parts  This  Parts List is provided to help the reader identify items in the accompanying exploded view drawing  Include nameplate  information  e g  complete model number and serial number  when ordering        4  Some 760 model code options are not shown in the accompanying exploded view drawing or listed in this Parts List  See  SD760  Table 1 5 for additional options     5  Speed adjuster parts are no longer available  The function can be implemented with an externally piped flow restrictor  such as ASCO catalog number V0222 or equivalent     i     6  1630255   Cam Follower Assemby 1        7 Mews   Lever Assembly                              C Jo 1      s  1630336   Span Adjusting Sew            O                1          9  163037  zero Lock Block 1    i585 Screw  10 32 x 172 Lg  Sioned ConePomt        gt           1 1802  Screw  8 32 x 1 4 Lg  FillterHead     ooo     163029                 1          i2  16301680   Cam  Linear  Rectilinear npu                1      12 163063   Cam  Linear  Rotary Input O O ooo       Meos   LowerCamindex                           o       1          4 16306    Upper Cam Inden 1    i5 163070   CamLekKmb             o      1          16a 163054   Spool Block      eb  163035   Spool Block  Hi Capacity       1          l    1630 1533   Spooi Block                    O   o 1          i7a   16300251           Std  
171. n thereto is specified in the schedule to this certificate and  the documents therein referred to     Sira Certification Service  notified body number 0518 in accordance with Article 9 of Directive 94 9 EC  of 23 March 1994  certifies that this equipment has been found to comply with the Essential Health and  Safety Requirements relating to the design and construction of equipment intended for use in  potentially explosive atmospheres given in Annex II to the Directive     The examination and test results are recorded in the confidential reports listed in Section 14 2     Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements  with the exception of those listed in the  schedule to this certificate  has been assured by compliance with the following documents     EN 50014 1997   Amendments 1 and 2 EN 50020 2002    If the sign  X  is placed after the certificate number  it indicates that the equipment is subject to special  conditions for safe use specified in the schedule to this certificate     This EC type examination certificate relates only to the design and construction of the specified  equipment  If applicable  further requirements of this Directive apply to the manufacture and supply of  this equipment     The marking of the equipment shall include the following          II 2G    EEx ia IIC T4 or T5 or T6  Ta   40  C to  85  C    The applicable temperature class and maximum ambient temperature depend upon the type of device that is  incorporated into the equipment
172. nd B A 2 3  2 2 Installation Dimensions and Adapter Shaft Options  Design Level D  2 4  2 3 Shaft Adapter Options and Feedback Lever Installation  Design Level D                        eee 2 5  2 4 Positioner with Typical Linear Actuator                sese nnne                              2 6  2 5 Feedback Lever Assemblies  Linear Applications  Design Levels A  B  and D  2 7  2 6 Integral Feedback Lever Input Shaft  Design Levels A and B    2 7  2 7 Positioner Mounting and Feedback Pin Connection              ccscesccesseeecsseeseecseeeseesseeseceeceseenseceseeeaeenaeceenseesaeenaes 2 8  2 8 Separate Input Shaft and Feedback Lever for Linear Actuators                   essere 2 9  2 9 Feedback Lever Orientation and Retaining Clip Position  Design Level D  2 9  2 10 Placing the Feedback Lever into the Retaining Clm    2 10  2 11 Placing the Retaining Clip on the Feedback Lever nennen                 2 10  2 12 Positioner with Rotary Actuator Esample                                              2 11  2 13 Feedback Components  Rotary Applications  Design Levels A  B  and D                                     2 12  2 14 Rotary Actuator  Basic Feedback Methode  2 13  3 1 Cam and Cam Indexing Components esses eene enne enne ener                            3 2  322 Standard Cams    sc reis M e eu eei 3 2  3 3  Standatd Cam  Characterisu  s         bo eet iet eo be ear tI Ode es 3 3  3A Cam Index Components    enr t p p nit v i EEN 3 4  3 5 Jndexing ot CW and  CCW  Cams  een ie UE 
173. ndard upper temperature limit of 4185  F   Standard Flow Spool Valve Kit 16300 468  High Flow Spool Valve Kit 16300 469  Low Gain Spool Valve Kit 16300 470  Cams   760 P E Cam Kit  rotary 90   Action  3 cams  Linear  QO      16300 783   760 P E Cam Kit  linear 60   Action  3 cams  Linear  QO      16300 784  75   Rotary Linear 16300 805  Cam  180     CW  Rotary   Linear 16300 807  Cam  30     Rectilinear   Linear 16300 816  Cam  180     CCW  Rotary   Linear A6X30005613  Spare Parts Kits  Figures 2 5 and 2 11    Spare Parts Kit includes all recommended rebuild parts as shown in SD760  Issue 2 16300 686   760 I P Transducer Filter Kit   5  per bag  for a Sensecon  ABB or ControlAir Transducer  NAMUR Adapter Kit  Design Level D TGX 16300 1556  Square Adapter Drive 1 2   Design Level D TGX 16300 1545  Linear Adapter  Design Level D TGX 16300 1557  Lever Kit 1 2  to 2  Stroke  Design Level D TGX 16152 712  Lever Kit 1 2  to 4  Stroke  Design Level D TGX 16152 714  Lever Kit 2  to 6  Stroke  Design Level D TGX 16152 716  Lever Kit 2  to 10  Stroke  Design Level D TGX 16152 720  Spare Parts  NEMA 4 Exhaust Vent 16300 203                1 8    September 2012                               SD760 Introduction  Retaining clip  Design Levels A and B 16300 8  One Piece Input Shaft Kits  Design Levels A and B  Figures 2 5 and 2 11    Input Shaft with NAMUR Shaft End 16300 690  Input Shaft with 0 5    x 0 5    Square Shaft End 16300 693  Input Shaft with 0 65    x 0 65    Square Shaft End 163
174. njury     Remove power from all wires and terminals before working  on this equipment     4 1 2 1 Mechanical Limit Switches    Table 4 1 lists connections for these options and Figure 4 3 identifies the involved terminals     Table 4 1 TB2 Terminal Block Connections    Mechanical Switches  Lower Switch N C   normally closed   Lower Switch N O   normally open     Lower Sensor          Upper Sensor            6   UpperSwithCom   Upper Sensor        Calibration  Mechanical Limit Switches       1  Refer to Table 4 1 and find the desired switch action  Connect an ohmmeter across that pair of switch terminals    2  Apply supply air pressure and set valve and actuator to the first desired limit position    3  Squeeze the tabs on one of the cams and rotate it in the direction of positioner input shaft rotation with  increasing input signal until the switch triggers causing a change in ohmmeter reading    4 4 September 2012    SD760 Option Kit Installation       4  Set valve and actuator at the second desired limit position  Connect the ohmmeter across the desired pair of  terminals     5  Squeeze the tabs on the second cam  and rotate it in the direction of input shaft rotation until the switch triggers     6  Exercise the valve and check switch operation  Disconnect calibration equipment     Note    Due to normal tolerances  it may be necessary to adjust the position of the limit  switches to insure that the switch actuating levers make contact with the cams  throughout the full ran
175. ns    US DRL  FAPEPPERL FUCHS NAMUR SENSORS   FM   pie       uspwm  116 0165F  Twinsburg l norm US GAP sheet 3 of 8                   TABLE 6     INDUCTIVE SENSORS  NOS    TO NJ2                                            Typ 1 Typ 2 Typ 3 Typ 4  Ui 16V Ui 16V Ui 16V Ui 16V  an ee datiuo Se    34 mW   64 mW   169 mW   242 mW  Model ren  NJ0 8 F Na 100 ETUHEHETHEETRNECE as 57  NJ1 5 F Na So a on re RENE RE MERE 57  NJ2 5 F Na   40   so   73   ss   100   66   81   100   45          89   30   45   74  NJ2 11 SNa   so   150   73   88   100   66   81   100   45   60   89   30   45   74  NJ2 11 SN Ga   so   150   76   91   100   73   88   100   62   77   81   54   63   63  NJ2 12GK SNa   so   150   73   ss   100   69   84   100   51   66   so   39   54   61  NJ2 F1 Na   30   so   73   88   100   66   81   100   45   60   89   30   45   74  NJ2 V3 Na   40   so  73   ss   100   66   s     100   4s   60   89   30   45   74  TABLE 7     INDUCTIVE SENSORS  NJ3    TO NJ10      Typ1 Typ2 Typ3 Typ4  Ui 16V Ui 16V Ui 16V Ui 16V  ee                    Eu    34 mW   64 mW   169 mW   242 mW  Model ren  NJ3 18GK S1Na 88   100     100   61  NJ4 12GK SNa                     61  NJ4 F Na   150   100   73   88   100   66   81   100   45   60   89   30   45   74  NJ5 18GK SNa  120   200   73   88   100   69   84   100   51   66   so   39   54   61  NJ5 30GK S1Na  100   200   73   88   100   69   84   100   51   66   so   39   54   61  NJ6 22 SNa   110   150   73   88   100   69   84   100   51   66 
176. ns com pi          Click the above link to go to the PI home page  Click Support and then Manuals  and then  under    Additional Manuals     select the product line  e g  Control  Solutions              1 10    September 2012          SD760 Installation       2 0 INSTALLATION    This section describes installation of a Series 760 Valve Positioner on either a linear actuator or a rotary actuator   Installation of the mechanical feedback linkage is also described  Optional Siemens bracket kits and feedback kits  are featured in these procedures     Section 2 1 describes shipping and storage of the positioner  A list of materials to be supplied by the installer will be  found in Section 2 2  Mechanical Installation procedures are provided in Section 2 3  This section is divided into  two subsections  2 3 1 Linear Actuator Applications and 2 3 2 Rotary Actuator Applications  Pneumatic connections  are identified and supply air recommendations are stated in Section 2 4 Pneumatic Connections  Section 2 5  Electrical Connections contains wiring data for non hazardous and hazardous locations  with references to the  control drawing and approval certificates as appropriate  Following Section 2 5  the Siemens control drawing   declaration of conformity  and approval certificates are found     Installation Sequence  The following is a typical installation sequence  It may be necessary to rearrange the sequence as circumstances    dictate  although the final step should always be calibra
177. nschaften  Die Sicherheitshinweise der mitgelieferten Produktdokumentation sind zu beachten   Page 1 6    SIEMENS    Anhang EG Konformitatserklarung  EC Declaration of Conformity    No  A5E00362252     Product description  Valve Positioner   Produktbezeichnung Model 760  Type   Typ 76abcdefghijkBl with a b c d e f g h i j   Type   Typ 76abcdefghijkD  with a b c d e f g h i j       Directive 89 336 EWG Electromagnetic Compatibility    Sms to directive     is based on conformance with the following standards      Standard    Date      EN 50081 1 1992  EN 50081 2 1993    EN 61000 6 1 2001  EN 61000 6 2 2001    Directive 2006 95 EG Low Voltage Directive                  Description                 Electromagnetic compatibility  EMC    Part 1  Generic standards  Emission standard for residential  commercial and light industrial  environments          Electromagnetic compatibility  EMC    Generic standards      Emission standard for industrial environment              Electromagnetic compatibility  EMC     Part 6 1  Generic standards    Immunity for residential  commercial and light industrial  environments        Electromagnetic compatibility  EMC     Part 6 2  Generic standards    Immunity for industrial environments          Conformance to directive 89 336 EWG is based on certification to equivalent standards as follows     Certification Description       FM J 1 1D4A1 AX FM Approval report for models 760P and 760E in accordance with    FM standard 3810  Electrical and Electronic
178. nstalt    Braunschweig und Berlin    4  SUPPLEMENT  according to Directive 94 9 EC Annex IIl 6    to EC TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X     Translation     Equipment    Cuboidal inductive sensors  types FJ     NJ    and NC       Marking       2G EExiallC T6 or       1G EExiallC T6    Manufacturer  Pepperl   Fuchs GmbH    Address  K  nigsberger Allee 87  68307 Mannheim  Germany    Description of supplements and modifications    In the future the cuboidal inductive sensors of types FJ     NJ    and NC    may also be manufactured  and operated according to the test documents listed in the test report PTB Ex 06 25344     The modifications concern the extension of type series NC     new variants   the introduction of type  series NB      the internal construction  further examples of the circuit diagram  new LED types  new  casting compound   the predefinition of the operating conditions for application as category 1  equipment  now relating to all cuboidal inductive sensors certified within the scope of this EC type  examination certificate as well as the adaption of the  Special Conditions      The EC type examination certificate is extended for the following types of cuboidal inductive sensors     NBN3 F69 NO     NBN4 V3 NO Y 189289  NCNA40O L2 NO     NCB20 L2 NO       Sheet 1 6    ed    EC type examination Certificates without signature and official stamp shall not be valid  The certificates may be circulated  only without alteration  Extracts or alterations ar
179. ntrol Drawing 15032 7602  following Section 2  Installation  for  temperature limitations          The design level is shown in the second to last letter in the positioner model designation  as stated on the nameplate label        September 2012 1 1    Introduction    SD760       Functional  Temperature Range     760P without                                                   760P with high temperature option               760E without options     760P or E with Option Kit     Ingr  ss i nenne nn nn    Connections     Pneumatic            essere    Supply Pressure       Air Consumption     Standard Spoo    Low Gain Spoo   High Flow Capacity Spool                              Flow Capacity  at 60 psi with 25  drop     Standard Spoo    Low Flow Spoo    High Flow Spoo      Input Signal    Performance  Linearity     E ans cade     Be een    Hysteresis                             WE     antiken  Deadbatid       2 ete a  Repeatability                     sse  Supply Pressure Effect       Hazardous Area Class Approvals    FM Approval                    eene         Normal span is 12 psig  760P  or 16 mA  760E        Valve travel span     40 C to  85  C   40  F to  185  F     29  C to  149  C   20  F to  300  F   Viton   input diaphragm   40  C to  75  C   40  F to  167  F    See Table 1 1 Positioner Specifications with Option Kit Installed  NEMA 4X  IP65          1 4 NPT   1 8 NPT   3 4 NPT or M25  conduit adapter  Design Level D   1 4 NPT   Epoxy Polyester Powder Coat   Single or Do
180. o   28   40   68   13   25   53    220   360   56   68   96   49   61   89   28   40   68   13   25   53     NCN15 M   NO     100   100   56   68   96   49   61   89   28   40   68   13   25   53     NCN20 U   NO     110   160   56   68   96   49   61   89   28          es   13   25   53      NCN30 U    NO      110   160   56   68   96   49   61   89   28          ea   13   25   53     NCN40 U   NO     120   130   56   68   96   49   61   89   28   40   68   13   25   53    220   360   56   68   96   49   61   89   28   40   68   13   25   53     NJ 2 V3 N     40   50   56   68   96   49   61   89   28   ao   68   13   25   53    140   130   56   68   96   49   61   89   28   40   68   13   25   53     NJ 20 U 4N     150   130   56   68   96   49   61   89   28   40   68   13   25   53    56   68   96   49   61   89   28   40   68   13   25    53    NJ 40     N    180   130   56   68   96   89     68     NJ 50 FP N    56   68   96   89     68         Seite 2 3       EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigungen ohne Unterschrift und ohne Siegel haben keine G  ltigkeit   Diese EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung darf nur unver  ndert weiterverbreitet werden   Ausz  ge oder Anderungen bed  rfen der Genehmigung der Physikalisch Technischen Bundesanstalt     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt     Bundesallee 100 e D 38116 Braunschweig    Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt P B    Braunschweig und Berlin    2  Erg  nzung zur EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X    Pr  fbericht    
181. o the  manufacture and supply of this equipment     The marking of the equipment shall include the following        9 2G EExiallC T6  Braunschweig  June 30  2000    sheet 1 4    EC type examination Certificates without signature and official stamp shall not be valid  The certificates may be circulated  only without alteration  Extracts or alterations are subject to approval by the Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt   In case of dispute  the German text shall prevail     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt     Bundesallee 100    D 38116 Braunschweig       Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt PIB    Braunschweig und Berlin     13  SCHEDULE   14  EC TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X     15  Description of equipment    The cuboidal inductive sensors  types FJ     NJ    and NC    are used to convert displacements  into electrical signals     The cuboidal inductive sensors may be operated with intrinsically safe circuits certified for  categories and explosion groups  EEx ia  IIC or IIB resp   EEx ib  IIC or IIB  The category as well  as the explosion group of the intrinsically safe cuboidal inductive sensors depends on the  connected supplying intrinsically safe circuit     Electrical data    Evaluation and    supply circuit                              type of protection Intrinsic Safety EEx ia IIC IIB  resp  EEx ib IIC IIB  only for connection to certified intrinsically safe circuits  maximum values     1 25mA   1 52        1  76 mA    P    34 mW        64 mW
182. om Siemens  see Section 1 4 Customer Product Support  Refer to the Parts List  section for recommended on hand spare parts     5 3 1 Input Shaft Replacement  Design Level A or B   When replacing the input shaft in a design level A or B positioner  order the Universal Input Shaft used in Design  Level D and the adapter needed for coupling to the actuator or feedback linkage  See Table 1 4 Option Kits for part  numbers    Note    It may be necessary to change additional mechanical feedback components     It may be necessary to add a shim between the positioner and mounting plate        5 2 September 2012    SD760 Maintenance       5 3 2 I P Transducer Filter Replacement   Each I P transducer contains a field replaceable supply air input filter  Frequency of filter replacement is dependent  upon the cleanliness of the supply air piped to the positioner  If the I P transducer seems to be sluggish  the filter  may simply be dirty     To replace the filter     l   2     5   6     Remove supply air pressure from the positioner and then loosen the four cover screws  Remove the cover     To locate the filter access screw  refer to Figure 4 11  the slotted  countersunk screw is directly above the wire  terminals on the I P transducer     Remove the access screw and use a scribe or other pointed instrument to carefully pick out the installed filter   Do not damage a mesh screen underneath the filter     Align the replacement filter concentrically over the hole in the transducer  Using a
183. on    a0    le  100  eo                    Pr  fbericht         Ex 04 23369    Zertifizierungsstelle Explosionsschutz Braunschweig  26  Februar 2004  Im Auftrag       Seite 2 2       EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigungen ohne Unterschrift und ohne Siegel haben keine G  ltigkeit   Diese EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung darf nur unver  ndert weiterverbreitet werden     Ausz  ge oder Anderungen bed  rfen der Genehmigung der Physikalisch Technischen Bundesanstalt     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt     Bundesallee 100   D 38116 Braunschweig          Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt    Braunschweig und Berlin    4  ERGANZUNG  gem     Richtlinie 94 9 EG Anhang Ill Ziffer 6    zur EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X    Ger  t  Quaderf  rmige induktive Sensoren Typen FJ     NJ    und NC       Kennzeichnung        I  2 G EEx      1   T6 bzw            G EEx ia      T6    Hersteller  Pepperl   Fuchs GmbH    Anschrift  K  nigsberger Allee 87  68307 Mannheim  Deutschland    Beschreibung der Erg  nzungen und Anderungen   Die quaderf  rmigen induktiven Sensoren der Typen FJ     NJ    und NC    d  rfen zuk  nftig auch wie in  den Pr  fungsunterlagen zum Pr  fbericht PTB Ex 06 25344 beschrieben gefertigt und betrieben  werden     Die Anderungen betreffen die Erweiterung der Typenreihe NC     neue Typen   die Einf  hrung einer  Typenreihe NB      den inneren Aufbau  weitere Schaltplanbeispiele  neue LED Typen  neue  Vergussmasse   die Festlegung von Einsatzbedingungen als Ka
184. or for the application and use of information  in this document  The information herein is subject to change without notice     Procedures in this document have been reviewed for compliance with applicable approval agency requirements and are  considered sound practice  Neither Siemens Industry  Inc  nor these agencies are responsible for product uses not included in the  approval certification s  or for repairs or modifications made by the user        September 2012 iii       Contents SD760          iv September 2012    SD760 Preface       PREFACE    Conventions and Symbols    The following symbols may be used in this manual and may appear on the equipment  The reader should become  familiar with the symbols and their meaning  Symbols are provided to quickly alert the reader to safety related text        Symbol Meaning          Indicates an immediate hazardous situation which  if not avoided  will result in death  A DANGER or serious injury              Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which  if not avoided  could result in death  Ad run or serious injury              Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which  if not avoided  may result in minor  A CAUTION or moderate injury              Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which  if not avoided  may result in  CAUTION property damage              Indicates a potential situation which  if not avoided  may result in an undesirable                   NOTICE result or state   Important Identifies an act
185. or the new types of cuboidal inductive  sensors is to be taken from the table        types C  L maximum permissible ambient temperature in   C for application in    l temperature class  en  T1 T1 T1 T1  INCN2 F56 N1      100   100   75   90   100   70   85  100  55   70   87                 NBN4 V3 NO     100   100   73   88   100   66   81   100   45   60   89   30   45   74         Test report         Ex 01 20124    Braunschweig  2001 08 23       Dr  Ing  U  Johannsmeyer  Regierungsdirektor    Sheet 2 2    EC type examination Certificates without signature and official stamp shall not be valid  The certificates may be circulated  only without alteration  Extracts or alterations are subject to approval by the Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt   In case of dispute  the German text shall prevail     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt    Bundesallee 100    D 38116 Braunschweig       Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt PIB    Braunschweig und Berlin    2  SUPPLEMENT  according to Directive 94 9 EC Annex 111 6    to EC TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X     Translation     Equipment  cubical inductive sensors  types FJ     NJ    and NC     Marking        12G EExiallC T6  Manufacturer  Pepperl   Fuchs GmbH    Address  K  nigsberger Allee 87  68307 Mannheim  Germany    Description of supplements and modifications    The cubical inductive sensors of type series NJ    and NC      listed as follows  may in future also be  used in hazardous areas requiring apparat
186. osen four positioner cover screws and remove the cover     5  Thread three hex standoffs  two long and one short  from the option kit into bosses in the positioner enclosure   see Figure 4 2 for the location of long and short standoffs  Tighten the three standoffs     6  4 20 mA and IK Q potentiometer feedback option kits only     Loosen two screws securing the potentiometer  bracket to the circuit board and rotate the bracket counterclockwise  see Figure 4 2  This provides clearance  while installing the board     7  Place the board on the three standoffs and tighten the captive screws     Board Mounting Screw     Shaft Extension   Long Standoff Under          wee  Potentiometer Bracket Under  and Locking Screw            eer   z Limit Switch  Adjust so potentiometer Pod   Ski ao Cams  2     gear fully engages upper    cam index gear     Direct Reverse Limit Switches  2     Action Switch       Board Mounting Screw  Terminal Block TB2  Long Standoff Under   Board Mounting Screw    Short Standoff Under Earth Ground    B  1600554a Wire Clamp  Ground Screw    Figure 4 2 PC Board Installation and Mechanical Limit Switch Components       September 2012 4 3    Option Kit Installation SD760       8     10     Mechanical or Proximity Limit Switch option kit     Install the extension shaft and compression washer   Skip  this step and go to Step 9 if a beacon or flat indicator is already installed   Place the compression washer on  the 1 4 20 threads of the input shaft  Install and tig
187. osure Type with 4X IP65 with 3 4 Inch NPT Conduit Connection  Standard   With Beacon Indicator    for Action selections with 90  cams    With Stroking Speed Adjusters     With Stroking Speed Adjusters and Beacon Indicator  With Flat Indicator     for Action selections with 60   cam       With Flat Indicator     for Action selections with 90   cam     With Stroking Speed Adjusters and Flat Indicator     for Action selections with 60  cam  With Stroking Speed Adjusters and Flat Indicator     for Action selections with 90  cam         1 3     1  3   1  3     x dle ar oe  le   les  p        Enclosure Type 4X IP65 with M25 Conduit Connection    Standard   With Beacon Indicator  For Action selections with 90   cams     With Stroking Speed Adjusters     With Stroking Speed Adjusters and Beacon Indicator  With Flat Indicator     for Action selections with 60   cam       With Flat Indicator     for Action selections with 90   cam     With Stroking Speed Adjusters and Flat Indicator     for Action selections with 60   cam     With Stroking Speed Adjusters and Flat Indicator     for Action selections with 90   cam      1 3     Come al lanl       Flow Capacity   Standard capacity spool valve assembly  Cv   0 3    High flow capacity spool valve assembly  Cv   0 6    Low flow gain spool valve assembly  approximately 1 2 standard flow gain       oU         Environmental Construction   Std  temp  760P   40 C to  85  C   40  F to  185  F   760E   40  C to  75  C   40  F to  167  F   High temp
188. oth positive or both negative   Connections to the following terminals may be swapped    A  TB2 1 and TB2 2 B  TB2 4 and TB2 5   Limit Switch Cable Parameters for Intrinsic Safety   Ungrounded Circuit Two Barriers     A  Cable Capacitance may not exceed Ca of the corresponding Barrier   B  Cable Inductance may not exceed La of the corresponding Barrier or the cable L R ratio  may not exceed the L R ratio of the corresponding Barrier     Ambient Temperature Range  See Sheet 2 of 13     Details Approved Title    J  Sweeney Control Drawing for    J  Sweeney  J  Sweeney Series 760 Valve Controller    19 May 08   Minor correction pg 13   J  Sweeney    22 June 11 Correct pg 12  add SII J  Sweeney  Siemens Industry  Inc   Spring House PA  USA 19477 15032 7602  Sheet 11 of 13    Drawing No        Proximity Switch Pepperl  amp  Fuchs GmbH Model NJ2 V3 N  Installation Instructions    Proximity Switch Intrinsically Safe Installation     1     D7  D8  o9     10       11    Safe Area    CSA Certified Single or Dual Channel    Pepperl  amp  Fuchs Switch Isolator Models   KHAS aExb   KHA6 aExb  or  KHD2 aExb    a            RS1   RTA   RWI    SOT   SR   SRT   SR2   SS1    SS2   ST   TA1   or TA2      b  1  2  I P  2 P  2 GS P  or 1 2S P     2  FM  See P amp F Drawings 116 0155 and 116 0165    Proximity Switch Installation in Division 2     Certification  CSA Division 2    Hazardous Area            see sheet 1 for details   TB2   I        CSA Certified Pepperl  amp   Fuchs Proximity Sensor  
189. out alteration  Extracts or       Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt    Braunschweig und Berlin  5  SUPPLEMENT TO EC TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X                          type2   types          typ4          maximum permissible ambient temperature in  C for application  in temperature class                         B    m E                    150   110  IFJTN     65   220   73   88   100   73   88   100  INCB2 FI NO     90   100   73  88   100   66   81   100   45  601 89  100 100  66   81   100  45  60  89     NCN2 F56 N1        100  100   75   90   100          88   100  INBNG F69 NO      100   100  72   87   too  65   80   100  41 86  63    INBN4 V3 NO     100   100   73          100  66  81   100   45  60  89    100 100  65   80   100  INBB15 U KNO      110   200   73  88   100   66  81   100  45 1601 89    110   200   73  88   100   66     1   100   45   60  89    105            73  88   100          81   100  45 60  89    300   73         100  66          100  45 60  89    100   100 100  66  81  100   45   60   89    110   160   73   88   100   68  81   100  45  60  89     NCN15 M  No   100 100   73   88   100  66  81  100  45  60  89    110   200 100  66   81   100  45  601 89    IEN AN  110   160   73   88   100  66          100  45  co   89    INCN30sU    NO    110  160   73   88   100   66   81   100  45 1601 89    220   360   73   88   100  66   81   100   45   60   89    100  66  81   100   45 60  89    INCN40 L2 NO      105 300 73 88  100    
190. r  equal percentage or quick opening   the linear cam is factory  installed unless otherwise specified on the order  Determine direction of rotation of cam and input shaft  CW or  CCW  with increasing input signal  This information will be needed to  1  orient the feedback lever    design  level D   2  change the cam  if necessary  and  3  index the cam     Fasten the mounting bracket to the positioner  Mounting bracket shape will vary with the design of the actuator     Read the positioner design level  A  B  or D  See the next to last character in the 14 character model  designation on the nameplate label  Figure 1 1      e Design level D  The end of the positioner input shaft protruding from the back of the positioner will be D   shaped  round shaft with a flat on one side   Perform steps 4 and 5 below     e Design level A or B  The input shaft and feedback lever are permanently attached  Go to step 6     Design Level D  Fasten the linear  lever  adapter to the positioner input shaft  If desired  apply a thread locking  solution to the adapter setscrew  Tighten the adapter setscrew on the flat of the input shaft to prevent adapter    slippage   Design Level D  Orient the feedback lever and install the retaining clip as follows     1  Orient the feedback lever as described and shown in Figure 2 9     Linear Adapter Feedback    Nut   Lever      gt  Note that one side ofthe feedback lever    is imprinted with CCW     FACE 760    CW AWAY  This message means that     When the C
191. rements    Met by the standards mentioned above    Zertifizier i Braunschweig  June 30  2000        Dr  Ing  U  Johannsmeyer  Regierungsdirektor    sheet 4 4    EC type examination Certificates without signature and official stamp shall not be valid  The certificates may be circulated  only without alteration  Extracts or alterations are subject to approval by the Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt   In case of dispute  the German text shall prevail     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt e Bundesallee 100   D 38116 Braunschweig       Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt PIB    Braunschweig und Berlin    1  SUPPLEMENT  according to Directive 94 9 EC Annex III 6    to EC TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X     Translation     Equipment  Cuboidal inductive sensors  types FJ     NJ    and NC     Marking       9 126 EExiallC T6  Manufacturer  Pepperl   Fuchs GmbH    Address  68307 Mannheim  Deutschland    Description of supplements and modifications    The existing EC type examination certificate for the cuboidal inductive sensors of types FJ     NJ     and NC    will be extended for the types   NCN2 F56 N1    and NBN4 V3 NO    corresponding to  supplementary test documents listed in the test report  The  Electrical data  listed below are valid for  these types     Furthermore the cuboidal inductive sensors of types FJ     NJ    and NC    may in future also be  manufactured according to the supplementary test documents of the test report  The modifications  conc
192. ries 760 Valve Controller    Drawing No     15032 7602 Sheet 6 of 13       Potentiometer Intrinsically Safe and Division 2 Installation   Ungrounded Circuit  Two Dual Channel Barriers    Safe Area Hazardous Area   see sheet 1 for details     Constant Dual Channel Barrier    Current  1  zer      Voltage Dual Channel Barrier  Measuring  2  Circuit    Barriers  1 and  2 must be CSA Certified and FM Approved dual channel grounded Shunt  Diode Barriers with output safety parameters  as follows     Voc  Uo  Channel 1   earth  lt  9V  Voc  Uo  Channel 2   earth  lt  9V   Isc  Io  Channel 1 or Channel 2 x 0 1A     CSA Certified and FM Approved MTL 761 Dual Channel Barrier is recommended as Barrier   1 and  2     Connections to the terminals TB1 V1 and TB1 V3 may be swapped     Potentiometer Cable Parameters for Intrinsic Safety   Ungrounded Circuit Two Dual Barriers        Maximum Values  Capacitance Inductance L R Ratio  A amp B 0 31 uF 110 uH 35 uH per Ohm  C amp E 1 32 uF 440 uH 140 uH per Ohm  DF amp G 3 52 uF 880 uH 280 uH per Ohm       Gas Groups                               Ambient Temperature Range  See Sheet 2 of 13     Details Approved Title    J  Sweeney Control Drawing for    J  Sweeney e  J  Sweeney Series 760 Valve Controller    19 May 08   Minor correction pg 13   J  Sweeney    22 June 11 Correct pg 12  add SII J  Sweeney  Siemens Industry  Inc   Spring House PA  USA 19477 15032 7602 Sheet 7 of 13    Drawing No        Limit Switch Installation    Limit Switch Intrinsi
193. rn potentiometer without end stops so it cannot be damaged by  rotating past the end of its range   See Figure 4 5     Potentiometer  Bracket and  Locking Screw    Alignment  Mark       Figure 4 5 Potentiometer Alignment    Mesh the gears lightly to eliminate backlash and tighten both of the bracket mounting screws  The red  alignment mark should mesh within two gear teeth of the centerline of the gears        4 6    September 2012    SD760 Option Kit Installation       4  Set the 4 20 mA feedback Dir Rev Action switch  refer Table 4 2  For example  while looking at the front of  the positioner  if you want the output to increase from 4 mA to 20 mA as the input shaft rotates CCW  set the  switch to position 2     Table 4 2 Limit Switch Position for Reverse or Direct Action  Dir Rev Action Shaft Rotation for Partial view of em mA  Switch Position   4 20 mA Output Board showing      nO Rey swans      Pos2   and Zero and Span  Pos  CEW Potentiometers    Components are on back of  board             MH00567a    5  Connect a DC power supply and ammeter in series to terminals V1 and V2 as shown in Figure 4 6     Ammeter 4 20 mA      Feedback 5  Power Supply      Option  3  10 36 Vdc E Terminals    V1 and V2  R Load    Figure 4 6 4 20 mA Loop Calibration    Apply supply air pressure and set the valve to the desired 4 mA position     6  7  Set the 4 mA output with the potentiometer labeled ZERO   8  Set the valve to the desired 20 mA output position    9  Set the 20 mA output with the
194. rocessor     memory  operating system      A copy of the product Service Instruction  User s Manual  or other technical publication should be at hand  The  Siemens public Internet site  see the table  has current revisions of technical literature  in Portable Document    Format  for downloading     To send an instrument to Siemens for warranty or non warranty service  call Customer Service and Returns and    request a Return Material Authorization  RMA      IMPORTANT    An instrument must be thoroughly cleaned  decontaminated  to remove any process  materials  hazardous materials  or blood born pathogens prior to return for repair  Read    and complete the Siemens RMA form s      For support and the location of your local Siemens representative  refer to the table below for the URL of the  Process Instrumentation  PI  portion of the Siemens public Internet site  Once at the site  click Support in the right  column and then Product Support  Next select the type of support desired  sales  technical  see the table below    documentation  or software        September 2012    1 9    Introduction    SD760             Online Support Request    http   www siemens com automation support request          Technical Support    1 800 333 7421  8 a m  to 4 45 p m  eastern time  Monday through Friday  except  holidays        Customer Service  amp  Returns  Public Internet Site    Technical Publications  in PDF             1 800 365 8766  warranty and non warranty        http   www usa sieme
195. ructions are provided with most kits  See Table 1 5 for a partial list  Contact Siemens   Process Instrumentation for the current list of feedback kits     e Cam Kit     Order to  typically  linearize the valve characteristic  A linear cam is installed in the positioner at the  factory  unless otherwise ordered  and several models include a selection of cams  see Table 1 2 Model  Designation for the cams included with a particular positioner model  See Table 1 5 for cam kits     e Output Option Kit     Order to add features  e g  Mechanical Limit Switches  Proximity Limit Switches   Feedback Potentiometer and 20 mA Feedback  to a positioner  These kits are also used when servicing a  positioner to replace a failed assembly  Installation is described in Section 4 of this manual and in an  installation instruction provided with most kits  See Table 1 5 for output option kits     The circuit board based output option kits listed in Table 1 1 were available at the time this manual was published   Also  see Table 1 5 for additional kit details and part numbers  Contact the factory or your local Siemens Industry   Inc   Process Industries division representative for current options  Refer to Customer Product Support later in this  publication for contact information        1 6 September 2012                                                                                                                                        SD760 Introduction  Table 1 4 Bracket Kits  BRACKET DIMENS
196. s and a pair of clearance slots that match those in Model 750E and 750P  Positioners  The pair of countersunk holes 1s for mounting the Model 760  See Figure 4 13 below     The adapter plate can also be used for mounting a Model 760 in other situations as well    See Table 1 4 for kit part number  Model 760 dimensions are shown in Section 2 Installation    Feedback Lever Feedback Pin Compatibility   A Model 750 feedback lever  linear applications  has a 1 4 inch slot for a 1 4 inch feedback pin  This is the same as  a Model 760 Design Level A or B  assuring compatibility  If replacing a 750 with a 760 Design Level D  which uses    a 5 16 inch feedback pin  it will be necessary to change some components  such as the feedback lever  in the  feedback linkage  Refer to Section 5 2 Feedback Lever and Feedback Pin Compatibility        September 2012 4 13    Option Kit Installation    SD760          Model 760  Back View  gt      Q     6 o  Positioner to Adapter     Plate Mounting Screws  i Tien  Countersink for KE me  1 4 20  2 Places S  1 0 e    25 4  AS  5 16 18 Tap     2 Places          Clearance Slot    750 Adapter Plate    760 Enclosure Exhaust  Vent Under Plate     MG00408c    Figure 4 13 Model 760 Positioner with Optional Model 750 Adapter Plate       4 14    September 2012    SD760 Maintenance       5 0 MAINTENANCE    The positioner requires no routine maintenance  It is highly recommended that quality instrument air be used as  described in section 2 4 2 Instrument Air Requ
197. s das Zeichen  X  hinter der Bescheinigungsnummer steht  wird auf besondere Bedingungen f  r die  sichere Anwendung des Ger  tes in der Anlage zu dieser Bescheinigung hingewiesen      11  Diese EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung bezieht sich nur auf Konzeption und Bau des festgelegten  Ger  tes gem     Richtlinie 94 9 EG  Weitere Anforderungen dieser Richtlinie gelten f  r die Herstellung  und das Inverkehrbringen dieses Ger  tes      12  Die Kennzeichnung des Ger  tes mu   die folgenden Angaben enthalten        126 EExiallC T6  elle Explosionsschutz Braunschweig  30  Juni 2000        Dr  Ing  U  Johannsmeyef A  Regierungsdirektor    Seite 1 4    EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigungen ohne Unterschrift und ohne Siegel haben keine G  ltigkeit   Diese EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung darf nur unver  ndert weiterverbreitet werden   Ausz  ge oder Anderungen bed  rfen der Genehmigung der Physikalisch Technischen Bundesanstalt     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt    Bundesallee 100    D 38116 Braunschweig    Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt PIB    Braunschweig und Berlin     13  Anlage   14  EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X     15  Beschreibung des Ger  tes    Die quaderf  rmigen induktiven Sensoren Typen FJ     NJ    und NC    dienen zur Umformung  von Weg  nderungen in elektrische Signale     Die quaderf  rmigen induktiven Sensoren d  rfen mit eigensicheren Stromkreisen  die f  r die  Kategorien und Explosionsgruppen  EEx ia  IIC oder IIB bzw   EEx ib  IIC oder IIB
198. s section is installation of a retaining clip on a feedback lever     IMPORTANT    Before proceeding  the positioner should be mounted on the actuator  the feedback  linkage installed  positioner and actuator piped  and  for Model 760E  positioner input  signal connections completed           September 2012 3 1    Cam Indexing and Positioner Calibration SD760       3 2 1 Cam Identification    Three standard cam profiles are available  LIN  linear   EP  modified equal percentage   and QO  quick opening    The letters CW and CCW identify the cam lobes     e Use the CW lobe when the input shaft  as viewed in Figure 3 1  rotates clockwise with an increasing input  signal     e Use the CCW lobe when an increasing input signal causes the input shaft to rotate counterclockwise   Figure 3 2 shows standard 60   and 90   cams and Figure 3 3 shows the characteristics of the three standard cams     Max Range Cam       Index Triangle Cam  Mid Range Cam a       Index Triangle  90   ndex  Gear   Linear Cam Only Lower Cam  Index  Min Range Index  Triangle  Visible  Under Upper    Cam Index Cam Locking  Screw  Cam Follower Cam Locking  Bearing Nut  Input Shaft      2  S  I          90 Degree Cams 60 Degree Cams    Figure 3 2 Standard Cams       3 2 September 2012    SD760 Cam Indexing and Positioner Calibration                      100  T  5  2 80     Quick  5 Opening  S  Square  5 Root   E 60       E  E           40      Equal    5 Percentage 8  9 E  z s  E  S 20   gt   x  0                 
199. sE      a                             ele  ele  NIN               00   00 pod ford peed IS             00   00                          pod bond bend bond boo boat                      00        00   00         00   00                           O   o0   CO  Hd Fed Bild Bo                                                        NJ 15 M1  N     NJ 50 FP N       NCN50 FP NO      NJ 0 8 F N     NJ 1 5 F N     NJ 2 5 F N     NJ 2 F1 N      NJ 2 V3 N      NJ 4 F N      NJ 6 F N      NJ 10 F N       NCN15 M    NO                        16  Test report PTB Ex 00 29269    sheet 3 4    EC type examination Certificates without signature and official stamp shall not be valid  The certificates may be circulated  only without alteration  Extracts or alterations are subject to approval by the Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt     In case of dispute  the German text shall prevail     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt     Bundesallee 100     D 38116 Braunschweig    Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt PIB    Braunschweig und Berlin  SCHEDULE TO EC TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X     17  Special conditions for safe use    1  For the application within a temperature range of  60   C to  20   C the cuboidal inductive  sensors  types FJ     NJ    and NC    must be protected against damage due to impact by  mounting into an additional housing     2  The connection facilities of the cuboidal inductive sensors  types FJ     NJ    and NC    shall  be installed as such that at 
200. sche Bundesanstalt    Braunschweig und Berlin  4  Erganzung zur EG Baumusterpriifbescheinigung PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X             Temperaturklasse  T6   T5  T4  T4  T6   T5   T4   T1    T1   FJ 6 110 N      150   110  59   71   99   56   68   96   45   57   81   37   49   63     FJ AN        65 220 59   71   99   56   68   96   45   57   81   37   49   63     NCB2 F1 NO        90   100   56   68   96   49   61   89   28   40   68   13   25   53    NCB2 V3 NO      100   100   56   68   96   49   61   89   28   40   68   13  NCN2 F56 N1    100   100   57   69   97  53   65   93  37   49   77                NBN3 F69 NO    100   100   55   67   95   48   60   88   24   36   62          337     NBN4 V3 NO     100   100   56   68   96   49   61   89   28   40   68   13   25   53            NCN4 V3 NO      68   96   49   et   89   28   40   68   13   25   53    NCB15 U    NO           96   49   61   89   28   40   68   13   25   53      68   96   49   61   89   28   40   68          Typen                                                                                                                     NCN15 M    NO    68  NCB20 L2 NO    56   68   96   49   61   89   28   40   68    NCN20 U    NO    56   68   96 61   89   56   68   96 61   89     49                  40   68    NCN40 L2 NO      NCNSO FP NO     220   360   56   68   96   49   61   89   28   40   68    INJ 0 8 F N     30   50   56   68   96   49   et   89   28   40                                                55 en  56  
201. sig  20027 299    76   1 268 Lockwasher   8  Ext  Tooth    51  52  52a  52b  53  54  55  56  57  58a  59a  59b  61  62  63  64  65  67  70  71b  72a  72b  73  74  75  76       Io n  oe 8           Page 2 of 3 December 2011    PARTS LIST Drawing No  16300 125PL  Rev December 2011           30 Dame        e 056   Screw  174 30 x 172 Lg  Flat Socket Head Cap    gt     53   SeNoe3   ReanngClpDesgnLewlD            oo       Linear Adapter  Design Level D          as      96   1 7440 Flat Washer  For Cover Retaining Screws  4       97 98 99  Labels  100    Screw  Flat Indicator Kit  Lever Arm  Linear Action  Design Level D  3240 Threaded Plug  In lieu of Gauges       December 2011 Page 3 of 3    
202. st the location of the clip on the lever as shown in Figure 3 6  detail C   This will allow the pin to slide away from the lever pivot point as the lever moves away from mid stroke     Design Level D  retaining clip shown at right    1   2     3     Note whether the CW or CCW cam lobe is being used  see step 7 above     Figure 3 7 shows retaining clip positions in details A and B  Select the position  that  1  provides consistent retaining action as the feedback pin moves in the slot  and 2  locates the clip where it does not interfere with nearby parts  The clip may  be installed on either side of the lever   The hooked ends of the clip will fit into  recesses cut into the lever     e CW Cam Lobe  Figure 3 7 detail A shows the correct installation of the retaining clip for pressure on  the upward side of the feedback lever slot     e CCW Cam Lobe  Figure 3 7 detail B shows the same for the downward side of the slot     With the lever at mid stroke  adjust the location of the clip on the lever such that the side of the clip closest  to the linear adapter is close to the feedback pin  This will allow the pin to slide away from the linear  adapter as the lever moves away from mid stroke  See Figures 2 9  3 6 detail C  and 3 7     Go to Section 3 3 Calibration after installing the clip          The 2  feedback lever must have the retaining clip installed so the clip engages the alignment pin as shown in Figure 2 9        September 2012 3 5    Cam Indexing and Positioner Calibrat
203. tallation     6  Index the cam and calibrate the positioner  Refer to Section 3 Cam Indexing and Positioner Calibration as  needed     7  Install beacon or flat indicator and PC board based option removed during calibration     8  Install the cover and tighten the cover screws to 20 Ib  in   2 3 N m      4 4      TRANSDUCER KIT   This section describes installation of the I P Transducer Kit in a Model 760P converting the positioner to a Model  760E  Refer to the kit instruction supplied with the I P Transducer for additional information    1  Remove supply pressure from the Positioner and loosen four screws securing the cover  Remove the cover     2  Placea small amount of non hardening pipe sealant on the pipe plug from the transducer kit  Thread the plug  into the  T  pneumatic input port     3  Refer to Figure 4 11 and the exploded view drawing in the Parts List section and remove the screw securing the  1 1 2 inch square manifold plate near the spool block  Remove the plate  Save the two O rings     4  Place two O rings from Step 3 in the enclosure recesses     I P Transducer   Wire Terminals     Left Terminal    Right Terminal         Transducer and Mounting Screw             Manifold Block with Two O Rings    Do NOT adjust the    I P calibration  screws Nd       Two O Rings in Recesses        Ground Screw Model 760P     Manifold Plate   Not Shown  Earth Ground    Wire Clamp    Conduit Wiring  d    Entrance Wire Clamp    Pipe Plug in T        aA Input Port  for I P Wires
204. tation  scale  1 1 date  2010 jun 03  Control Drawing change notice respons    US DRL  F  PEPPERL FUCHS NAMUR SENSORS FM ih Mis approved   US DWR 1 16 0165F  Twinsburg norm US GAP sheet 8 of 8             Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt PIB    Braunschweig und Berlin        1  EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung     2  Ger  te und Schutzsysteme zur bestimmungsgem    en Verwendung  in explosionsgef  hrdeten Bereichen   Richtlinie 94 9 EG     3  EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigungsnummer    PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X   4  Ger  t  Quaderf  rmige induktive Sensoren Typen FJ     NJ    und NC      5  Hersteller  Pepperl   Fuchs GmbH   6  Anschrift  D 68307 Mannheim     7  Die Bauart dieses Ger  tes sowie die verschiedenen zul  ssigen Ausf  hrungen sind in der Anlage zu  dieser Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung festgelegt      8  Die Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt bescheinigt als benannte Stelle Nr  0102 nach Artikel 9 der  Richtlinie des Rates der Europ  ischen Gemeinschaften vom 23  Marz 1994  94 9 EG  die Erf  llung der  grundlegenden Sicherheits  und Gesundheitsanforderungen f  r die Konzeption und den Bau von Ger  ten  und Schutzsystemen zur bestimmungsgem    en Verwendung in explosionsgef  hrdeten Bereichen  gem     Anhang I  der Richtlinie     Die Ergebnisse der Pr  fung sind in dem vertraulichen Pr  fbericht PTB Ex 00 29269 festgelegt      9  Die grundlegenden Sicherheits  und Gesundheitsanforderungen werden erf  llt durch   bereinstimmung  mit  EN 50014 1997 EN 50020 1994     10  Fall
205. tegorie 1 Gerat f  r jetzt alle  quaderf  rmigen induktiven Sensoren die Bestandteil dieser EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung sind  sowie die Anpassung der    Besonderen Bedingungen        Die EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung wird um folgende Typen der quaderf  rmigen induktiven  Sensoren erweitert     NBN3 F69 NO     NBNA4 V3 N0 Y 189289  NCNAO L2 NO     NCB20 L2 NO       Seite 1 6    EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigungen ohne Unterschrift und ohne Siegel haben keine G  ltigkeit   Diese EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung darf nur unver  ndert weiterverbreitet werden   Ausz  ge oder Anderungen bed  rfen der Genehmigung der Physikalisch Technischen Bundesanstait     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt     Bundesallee 100    D 38116 Braunschweig       Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt    Braunschweig und Berlin  4  Erganzung zur EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X    F  r folgende Typen der quaderf  rmigen induktiven Sensoren werden die Einsatzbedingungen als  Kategorie 1 Gerat mit dieser 4  Erg  nzung neu festgelegt     FJ 6 110 N    NJ 1 5 F N      FJ 7 N    NJ 2 F1 N     NCN2 F56 N1    NJ 2 5 F N     NBN3 F69 NO    NJ 3 V3 N     NBN4 V3 NO    NJ 4 F N     NBN4 V3 NO Y 189289 NJ 6 F N     NCNA40 L2 NO    NJ 10 F N     NCB20 L2 NO    NJ 15 M1  N     NJ 0 8 F N    NJ 30P U  1N       Zur besseren Verst  ndlichkeit werden die  Elektrischen Daten  sowie die Tabellen  welche die  Zusammenhange zwischen den h  chstzul  ssigen Umgebungstemperaturen  den Temperaturklassen   den 
206. ten ts 2 17  2 5 1 Non Hazardous Locatons  eene nennen trennen eren enne nennen 2 17  2 52  Hazardous Locations  ee re Ae        derat iue tt a rtu d er te 2 17  2 5 2 1 FM and CSA Hazardous Location Precautions              cccesccesecssesseceeceseceeeeneecaeeeseeeeeeseeeereneens 2 18  2 5 2 2 Sira Certification Service Special Conditions for Safe                                                2 19  2 5 2 3 Supplemental Instructions for ATEX Certified Model 2 19  2 5 2 4 Hazardous Location Installation Steng  2 19  2 5 2 5 Control Drawings  Declarations  and Certifications                    essere 2 20  3 0 CAM INDEXING AND POSITIONER CALIBRATION                 eee eee eese nete enean en etin ense tasse taste ense teen aea 3 1  3 1 EQUIPMENT NEEDE D ra eea AN E a AE AAA T A AN AS OA AA AAA 3 1  3 2 CAM INSTALLATION AND INDESINO        3 1  3 21  Cam Identifications las eet tete itta mit eto an tial tet e orte 3 2  3 22 Carin In x tin Go oe               3 3  3 3 CALIBRATION    eee etre eei ie eerte eerte teste ie ete tnde          ee eee Eben innen binnen 3 7  3A SPLIT RANGING cenin ni o Ta tette een A TR WE I n Eee HE Ee DS HE e Ee ER RE es 3 8  4 0 OPTION KIT INSTALLATION                                             4 1  4 1 PC BOARD BASED OUTPUT OPTION KITS 2                                                 4 2  AMT Installation 2 2 02 ooo ver         dr tete pet Cones dates ike doses sackets etat rete      4 3  4 1 2 Calibration and Wiring of PC Board Based Options nenne
207. the cover is installed     Reinstall positioner cover  Tighten cover screws to 20 Ib  in   2 3 N m      E D A    Check that the correct message     OPEN    or    CLOSED    appears in all lens windows        September 2012 4 9    Option Kit Installation SD760       4 2 2 Flat Indicator  Use the following procedure to re install the Flat Indicator after the positioner has been calibrated  See Figure 4 10     1  Place the compression washer onto the 1 4 20 male threads of the input shaft  Thread the extension shaft onto  the input shaft  Tighten the extension shaft until the compression washer is completely flat     Place the indicator disk on the end of the extension shaft  Install the hold down screw but do not tighten   Apply the minimum input signal  3 psi or 4 mA  to the valve positioner   Rotate and position the indicator as needed  Tighten hold down screw     Install positioner cover  Tighten cover screws to 20 Ib  in   2 3 N m      Sv    dee 28 o    Check that the indicator provides the proper indication     MH00550a       Shaft Extension on Input Shaft  Compression Washer    Flat Indicator with Mounting Screw    bal  wW  wW   e       I       Figure 4 10 Flat Indicator    4 3 INPUT SHAFT KITS FOR DESIGN LEVELS A AND B    An Input Shaft Kit for Design Levels A and B contains an input shaft that terminates in either a feedback lever for  linear applications or a NAMUR shaft end or square shaft end for rotary applications     Note    Shaft kits for design levels A and B hav
208. the cut end  Re install the pin     8  Mount the positioner on the actuator and guide the feedback pin into the slot in the feedback lever     Note    Design Level D  The retaining clip is typically installed on the feedback lever at the  factory  If this makes inserting the 5 16 inch feedback pin in the feedback lever  difficult  remove the clip and either reinstall it after inserting the pin in the lever slot or  when indexing the cam in Section 3 Cam Indexing and Positioner Calibration   Reposition the retaining clip on the feedback lever as shown in Figure 3 6 or 3 7     2 3 2 Rotary Actuator Applications    Figure 2 12 shows a positioner and a typical rotary actuator  The positioner is mounted to the actuator using a  bracket and appropriate hardware  Actuator valve position is fed to the positioner through a NAMUR shaft adapter  or other style adapter  Figure 2 13 shows typical adapters for design levels A  B and D  The adapter on the  positioner input shaft will often directly engage the actuator shaft  In other instances  an additional coupler will be  needed to transfer actuator shaft rotation to the positioner input shaft  The mounting bracket and shaft adapter s   will vary with positioner design level and model as well as with actuator manufacturer and actuator model  Figure  2 14 shows several feedback methods  Mounting kits and adapters are available from Siemens for many rotary  actuators        2 10 September 2012    SD760 Installation       Read the following
209. tic  direct or reverse acting Division 1  Group E  F      for models 22 06 66     O 4   20 mA or 20 014  mA 22 06 67  22 06 68  22 06 69 only   An approved seal must be used at the enclosure conduit  Hazardous Area opening to maintain Intrinsic Safe circuit integrity   Class     Division 1 LA   OMNE  Groups C  D No revision can be made without CSA notification E  BARRIER PARAMETERS Werkstlickkanten nach DIN 6784  Allgenelntoleranzen   bis 6     bers  Uber oj Uber 00            max  voltage  Vmax  min  resistance  Rmin        e Vorschrift     hne Angab    ohne Angaben   o DIN 7168  m      lag        sos   203    e ee  po ce      BE    30 e BETA puis z L  ngenma  e  Winkelma  e    28 120    Tag   Name   Benennung       nan  MEL Connection Diagram             ger         l P Converter 22 06 XX    BEY   WI       E pese  I   Renz       ug      E         Das Urheberrecht an dieser Zeichnun  verbleibt bei uns  Vervietfalti    rechtliche Benutzun   Dritte hat zivit     Pa    Ab  ident Nr  Bla von  2 CES MEM sq uve a S  q p BB 900842 CSA    ER e EEE I BEE EE SER                             ABB Automation Products  Control Document No  900842    CSA Approved for I P Converter Type 22 06 XX    Hazardous Area Nonhazardous Area    Class    Division 1  Groups A  B  C  D    intrinsically safe circuit    V P circuit resistance  Riz260 ohms   10  Vmax     Rmin     see table below                        at 20  C  TCR  0 4  1K      L    CSA Approved  Safety barrier    ADD                       
210. tion     1  Mount the positioner on the actuator using a Siemens bracket kit or installer fabricated mounting bracket   Install either the Siemens mechanical feedback components or installer fabricated feedback components     2  Change the cam to the desired type and lobe  as necessary  and index the cam  Refer to Section 3 2 Cam  Installation and Indexing     3  Install options  e g  Output Option Kit  Indicator Option Kit  in the positioner  Refer to Section 4 Option Kit  Installation and to the Instructions provided with the kit     4  Calibrate the positioner  align the beacon or flat indicator as needed  and check that the valve operates  correctly  Refer to Section 3 3 Calibration     Hazardous Area Installations    Before continuing  read the following warning  If installing in a hazardous area  refer to Siemens control drawing  15032 7602 and the certifications following Section 2 5 Electrical Connections  The positioner approvals plate   Figure 1 2  must display the required agency approvals for the installation location and hazardous area       classification   A WARNING          Electrical shock hazard  e Explosion hazard   Y  Can cause death or injury  1 22      SUN  e Remove power from all wires and terminals before working on US    equipment     e  n potentially hazardous atmosphere  remove power from equipment  before connecting or disconnecting power  signal  or other circuit     e Observe all pertinent regulations regarding installation in hazardous  area    
211. tion as necessary  Refer to Section 2 3 1 Linear Actuator  Applications as needed     e Linear action     The feedback pin moves freely in the feedback lever slot for the entire valve stroke  Adjust  the pin position and positioner location as necessary  Shorten the feedback pin if it contacts adjacent parts  or the positioner during normal range of motion     e Rotary and linear action     The feedback linkage moves smoothly without binding and does not prevent the  valve from fully stroking     e Rotary and linear action     All linkage hardware and positioner mounting hardware is secure     Elevating the zero and suppressing the span will provide more valve seating force  For example  setting the zero at  2  input and spanning at 98  input will assist the valve in closing tightly and opening fully     Cams are designed to allow 1096 over under range  However  if under range is used  the zero and span will be  slightly interactive             Zero  Adjustment  Screw   Span   Adjustment   Screw Zero Lock  Screw   Span Lock   Screw    MH00548a          Figure 3 8 Calibration Adjustments    1  Make all needed pneumatic and electrical connections  Refer to Section 2 Installation as needed  See Figure 4   11 for I P Transducer terminal polarity     2  Remove the positioner cover by loosening four cover screws        September 2012 3 7    Cam Indexing and Positioner Calibration SD760       3  Apply supply pressure to the positioner and actuator     A CAUTION    Do not exceed the 
212. tion is converted by the feedback linkage to a rotary motion  and coupled to the positioner input shaft  This linkage will vary with positioner design level and model as well as  with actuator manufacturer and actuator model  Mounting kits and feedback linkage components are available from  Siemens for many actuators        Figure 2 4 Positioner with Typical Linear Actuator    Note the Installation Considerations on page 2 7  Then perform the Mechanical Installation procedure on page 2 9   A typical Siemens linear bracket kit is used to mount the positioner on a linear or rising stem actuator and a typical  Siemens feedback kit is used to couple the actuator shaft to the positioner input shaft  If another mounting bracket  and feedback linkage will be installed  use this procedure as a guide  The input shaft and feedback lever for design  levels A and B and for design level D are shown in Figures 2 5 and 2 6     Note    Refer to the Kit Installation Instructions supplied in Siemens bracket kits and adapter  kits to mount the positioner and install the feedback linkage        2 6 September 2012    SD760 Installation       Installation Considerations  e The positioner may be mounted in any orientation     e When the installation is completed  the feedback lever must be approximately perpendicular to the actuator  stem with the actuator at mid stroke     e        feedback linkage between actuator stem and positioner input shaft typically includes a slotted bracket  attached to t
213. to determine the required pneumatic connections  between the positioner and the actuator  Table 2 3 identifies the actuator fail position with loss of either input signal  or supply air for single acting and double acting actuators     Table 2 1 Pneumatic Connections    PURPOSE  Output to actuator  Pressure in V2 increases with increasing input signal   Supply pressure to system  Output to actuator  Pressure in V1 decreases with increasing input signal   Exhaust port  Can be piped away from positioner  DO NOT PLUG   760P input port  Plugged in 760E electro pneumatic valve positioners     A WB       Plugging or applying pressure to the Exhaust port will damage the unit and may cause  personal injury                             Pressure in excess of 150 psi in the V1  V2  or Supply port may damage the positioner   Supply pressure to the positioner must not exceed actuator maximum pressure rating     Input pressure in excess of 35 psi may cause the input gauge to go out of calibration   Input pressure of 120 psi may cause the input gauge to burst     Table 2 2 Pneumatic Connections    TYPE  increasing input signal   increasing input signal        Double acting 1  Note actuator position desired for minimum  input signal to positioner    2  Connect V2 to actuator port that causes  actuator to move away from position noted  in above step    3  Connect V1 to remaining port     2 14 September 2012       SD760    Installation       2 4 1 Piping    Pneumatic supply  input  output  and 
214. tory of the  previous certification and has not been issued as a  document in this format    e The introduction of Variation 1                 SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR SAFE USE  None  ESSENTIAL HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS  EHSRs     The relevant EHSRs that are not addressed by the standards listed in this certificate have been  identified and individually assessed reports listed in Section 14 2     CONDITIONS OF CERTIFICATION  The use of this certificate is subject to the Regulations Applicable to Holders of Sira Certificates     Holders of Type Examination Certificates are required to comply with the production control  requirements defined in Article 8 of directive 94 9 EC     This certificate and its schedules may only be    reproduced in its entirety and without change     Form 9402 Issuel    Tel  444  0  1244 670900  Page 4 of 4 Fax   44  0  1244 681330  Email  info siracertification com    Web  www siracertification com       Sira Certification Service    Rake Lane  Eccleston  Chester  CH4 9JN  England    Certificate Annexe    Certificate Number     Sira O3ATEX4578    sira       Equipment  Series 760 Valve Controllers  Applicant  Siemens Energy and Automation Inc  CERTIFICATION  Issue 0  Number Sheet Rev  Date Description  15032 7612 1of6 1 10 Feb 04 General view  standard case  15032 7612 2 of 6 1 10 Feb 04 I P converter  15032 7612 3 of 6 1 10 Feb 04 Option PCB parts  15032 7612 4 of 6 1 10 Feb 04 Option PCB layout  15032 7612 5 of 6 1 10 Feb 04 Option board schemati
215. tstechnische Angaben  Es darf nicht ohne Absprache mit dem Normenfachmann geandert werden     This document contains safety relevant information  It must not be altered without the authorization of the norm expert                         Confidential according to ISO 16016 Only valid as long as released in EDM or with a valid production documentation  scale  none  date 2009 Feb 25  CONTROL DRAWING change noticelrespons    US DRL   dJPEPPERL  FUCHS Nonincendive sensors FM approved   US DWR 116 0155E  150 1681     Twinsburg norm US  GAP sheet 4 of 1                   HAZARDOUS  CLASSIFIED  LOCATION NONHAZARDOUS LOCATION  Class    Division 1  Groups A  B  C  D  Class 11  Division 1  Groups E  F  G    Class 111  Division 1                                     Or  Any FM certified associated apparatus   Class I  Zone 0  Groups IIC T6  Ta   60  C  with applicable division and group or   zone and group approval and with entity  parameters    Pepperl Fuchs  Inc     NAMUR      output proximity sensor  See Tables DIVISIONS ZONES   for entity parameters Voc  lt  Vmax Uo  lt  Ui  Isc  lt  Imax lo  lt  li  Ca   Ci Ccable Co   Ci Ccable  La 2 Li Lcable Lo   Li Lcable   Notes    1  For installation in a Division 1 hazardous  classified  location  the wiring must be  in accordance with the National Electrical Code  NFPA 70  Article 504  For installation in a Zone 0  hazardous  classified  location  the wiring must be in accordance with the National Electrical Code   NFPA 70  Article 505  For 
216. uble Acting   Direct or Reverse   150 psig maximum    0 5 scfm  0 5 scfm  1 0 scfm typical    9 scfm  Cv   0 3   9 scfm  Cv   0 3  Supply  18 scfm  Cv   0 6  Supply  1 2 pressure gain of standard     3 15 psig  3 27 psig  see Table 1 3 Model Designation   4 20 mA    90 degree standard   1 2 inch to 6 inches  longer lengths available on request   Equal    Quick Opening  Linear   160      60 psi supply standard  80    with high temp option  Adjustable  60  to  25  of normal span    Adjustable  10  to  60  of normal span        0 5  of normal span   typical   0 75  of normal span   typical     0 75  of normal span   typical    1 0  of normal span   typical    Less than or equal to 0 2596 of span   Within 0 596 of span    Less than 0 2  of span  for a 5 psi change in supply pressure    Intrinsically Safe  Entity    Class I  Div  1  Groups A  B  C  D   Class II  Div  1  Groups E  F  G   Class III  Div  1   When installed in accordance with Siemens drawing 15032 7602  Non Incendive    Class I  Div  2  Groups A  B  C  D       1 2    September 2012    SD760 Introduction       Suitable for   Class II  Div  2  Groups F  G  Class III  Div  2   CSA Certification reien eiin i Intrinsically Safe   Class I  Div  1  Groups A  B  C  D  Class II  Div  1  Groups E  F  G  Class II  Div  1  When installed in accordance with Siemens drawing 15032 7602  Suitable for   Class I  Div  2  Groups A  B  C  D  Class II  Div  2  Groups     F  G  Class     Div  2    EMO ite E HT eem een EN50081 1 and EN5008
217. ure and set actuator and valve to 50     5      2  Loosen  but do not remove  the potentiometer bracket screws  Swing the potentiometer away from the input  gear  Rotate the potentiometer gear until the red alignment mark is aligned with the input gear  See Figure 4 5     3  Mesh gears tightly to eliminate backlash and tighten both bracket mounting screws  The alignment mark  should mesh within two gear teeth of the centerline of the gears as illustrated in Figure 4 5     4  Set valve to 0  position  Read the resistance between V2 and V1 and between V2 and V3 with an ohmmeter   One of these two readings will be high  and one will be low  If low end resistance is less than 0 Q  false  reading  or greater than 130 Q  disengage and rotate the potentiometer gear by one tooth until the resistance is  between 0 and 130 Q  Each tooth on the potentiometer gear represents 128 Q of potentiometer resistance     5  Disconnect calibration equipment   Wiring     Voltage Feedback    Connections are made to terminal block TB1  see Figures 4 4B and 4 8  For voltage feedback  connect reference  voltage to terminals V1 and V3  and use V2 to measure output voltage  Refer to Control Drawing 15032 7602 for  installation in a hazardous location     Terminals Feedback Potentiometer    V1   V2             3  Clockwise Valve Travel 8   v3 J    Figure 4 8 1K Q Feedback Potentiometer Schematic    Wiring  Direct or Reverse Acting      Resistive Feedback    Refer to Table 4 3 to determine the correct term
218. us of category 1     The modifications exclusively concern the  Electrical data   modified maximum permissible ambient  temperatures for use as category 1 apparatus  reduction of the intrinsically safe evaluation and supply  circuit to category ia  as well as the marking of the following types of cubical inductive sensors     NCB2 F 1 NO    NCN20 U    N0    NJ 20 U  N     NCB2 V3 NO    NCN30  U    NO    NJ 30 U  N     NCN4 V3 NO    NCN40 U    N0O    NJ 40     N     NCB15 U    NO    NCN50 FP NO    NJ 50 FP N     NCB40 FP NO    NJ 2 V3 N      NCN15 M    NO    NJ 15 U  N       In future the marking of the above listed sensors for application as category 1 apparatus will be        x  114 G EEx ia IIC T6    The  Special conditions  are also valid for use as category 1 apparatus without changes     Sheet 1 3    EC type examination Certificates without signature and official stamp shall not be valid  The certificates may be circulated  only without alteration  Extracts or alterations are subject to approval by the Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt   In case of dispute  the German text shall prevail     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt    Bundesallee 100   38116 Braunschweig  Germany    Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt PIB    Braunschweig und Berlin  2  SUPPLEMENT TO EC TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X    Electrical data    Evaluation and supply circuit                type of protection Intrinsic Safety EEx ia IIC IIB  for connection to certified intrinsi
219. ution  0 1A   125 Vdc  Mechanical life 1 million cycles no load  100 000 full Essentially infinite  BG nen ee M NNNM  Closed  Common    Repeatability Within 0 3  valve travel span Within 0 3  valve travel span                      September 2012 1 3    Introduction SD760       1 2 MODEL DESIGNATION    Each positioner has a nameplate label and a ratings label inside the cover  see Figure 1 1  The nameplate label  shows the complete model number  serial number  and installed options  The model designation list  Table 1 2   presents the alphanumeric identifier for each model feature  The ratings label shows the temperature and electrical  ratings     MODEL  760P11AAANNND6        Ambient Temperature Range   20   to  76   C  SER  No   00074915 MFG  DATE  may be  40   w o Proximity switches and w o EEx nL   PON  9200159601 02 25 08 may be  86   w o I P Module  SALES No  3001376506 000010 Electrical Ratings  4 20mA Feedback Board  36V  20mA  Potentiometer  32V  32mA  INSTALLED OPTIONS  Limit Switches  250Vac  10A  250Vdc  0 25A  125Vdc  0 64  up D Proximity Switches  25Vdc  UP Module  40V  20mA  SWITCH  1 LI For Hazardous Locations  Explosive Atmospheres  ratings and  SWITCH  2     temperature considerations refer to Siemens drawing 15032 7602  PROXIMITY SWITCH  1 LI Caution  Use supply wires suitable for 5 C above surrounding ambient   PROXIMITY SWITCH  2 LI  4 20mA FEEDBACK       POTENTIOMETER  1K     9    Visit us at our website  http   www usa siemens com ia   Sample Nameplate L
220. v  438 520 002  429 850 153  448 505 206  438 538 009    448 550 001    Dee   Title   Description  09 08 05   Manifold Assy    18 08 05   590 ACM 4 20mA 3 15PSI T590 Transducer    02 01 07   Body Assembly T590 Transducer  09 04 07   Coil Lamination Sub assembly T590 Transducer    Flapper Sub Assembly T590 Transducer  446 917 001 1 Lamination  Stamped T590 Transducer  446 772 002 Bobbin  Molded T590 Transducer  448 538 007 2 Coil Assembly T590 Transducer  446 732 963   2 Label  Control T590 Transducer  431 990 047 05 04 07   Interconnection Diagram T590 Transducer  438 850 155 Pneumatic Sub Assy T590 Transducer  436 799 061 Circuit Board T590 Transducer    CTA P00820  C 14 01 07   Assembly T590 Transducer  432 714 040 E 22 06 06   Cover  Hot Stamped T590 Transducer       THIS CERTIFICATE MAY ONLY BE REPROD D IN ITS ENTIRETY AND WITHOUT CHAN    FM Approvals Ltd  1 Windsor Dials  Windsor  Berkshire  UK  SL4 1RS    T   44  0  1753 750 000 F   44  0  1753 868 700 E mail  atex fmapprovals com www fmalobal com    FM F ATEX 029  Feb 07  Page 3 of 4    SCHEDULE FM Approvals    Urner od She EN Cito  Dina       to Type Examination Certificate No  FMO7ATEX0003X    Drawing No  Rev Title   Description  436 714 036 4 17 08 04   Cover  429 850 166     09 05 06   590 ACP 4 20mA 3 15PSI T590 Transducer  446 732 984 2 05 04 07   Label  ATEX T590 Transducer  442 732 985 p 05 04 07   Label  ATEX  Typed T590 Transducer  441 622 089 4 07 10 04 07   Instruction Manual   446 732 993 LEN 05 04 07   La
221. wie alle weiteren sicherheitsrelevanten Angaben sind von diesen    nderungen nicht betroffen     Elektrische Daten    Auswerte  und    Versorgungsstromkreis                        in Z  ndschutzart Eigensicherheit EEx ia IIC IIB  nur zum Anschlu   an bescheinigte eigensichere Stromkreise  H  chstwerte             Typa   mez  U 16V   U 16V    25        1 225 mA        34 mW   Pi   64 mW                             169 mW        242 mw       Seite 1 2                      a      nn   i EE    EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigungen ohne Unterschrift und ohne Siegel haben keine G  ltigkeit   Diese EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung darf nur unver  ndert weiterverbreitet werden   Ausz  ge oder Anderungen bed  rfen der Genehmigung der Physikalisch Technischen Bundesanstalt     Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt     Bundesallee 100     D 38116 Braunschweig       Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt D  I    Braunschweig und Berlin  3  Erg  nzung zur EG Baumusterpr  fbescheinigung PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X    Der Zusammenhang zwischen dem Typ des angeschlossenen Stromkreises  der h  chstzul  ssigen  Umgebungstemperatur f  r den Einsatz als Kategorie 2 Ger  t und der Temperaturklasse sowie den  wirksamen inneren Reaktanzen f  r diesen Typ der quaderf  rmigen induktiven Sensoren ist der  nachfolgenden Tabelle zu entnehmen            mei         2 _  H  chstzul  ssige Umgebungstemperatur in   C bei Einsatz in       Typ          Ci Li NE Temperaturklasse   nF     uH  T6   T5  T4   T1                wov
222. y       Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt       Braunschweig und Berlin    3  SUPPLEMENT  according to Directive 94 9 EC Annex III 6    to EC TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE PTB 00 ATEX 2032 X     Translation     Equipment    Cuboidal inductive sensors  types FJ     NJ    and NC     Marking    I2G EExiallC T6  Manufacturer  Pepperl   Fuchs GmbH    Address  K  nigsberger Allee 87  68307 Mannheim  Germany       Description of supplements and modifications    The EC type examination certificate will be extended for the cuboidal inductive sensor  type  NJ 3 V3 N      The cuboidal inductive sensor  type NJ 3 V3 N    is exclusively intended for operation in  hazardous areas where category 2 equipment is required     Further modifications concern the marking  the internal construction as well as the operating  instructions of the cuboidal inductive sensors  These modifications have no affect on the  Electrical  data   the  Special conditions  and all further safety relevant specifications     Electrical data  Evaluation and supply circuit type of protection Intrinsic Safety EEx ia IIC IIB    only for connection to certified intrinsically safe circuits  Maximum values                type 1   type 2    type 3  U 16V   Uus16eV   us16v  1 25mA   1 25mA   1 52          76 mA  P   34mW        64 mw JP    169 mw        242 mw                Sheet 1 2       EC type examination Certificates without signature and official stamp shall not be valid  The certificates may be circulated    only w
223. y Kit   e High temperature application or ozone atmospheric condition     Select the Viton Nomex gasket     e Other applications     Select the neoprene nylon gasket     Viton Nomex gasket  has a V notch or    color dot and a  distinct cinnamon  scent        MH00589a    Spool Block Gasket    9  Align the selected gasket with the matching air passages and mounting holes in the new spool block  Insert two  8 32 screws from the kit through the block and gasket     10  Install the block and gasket in the enclosure  Align the spool block and gasket with the air passages and  mounting holes in the enclosure  Tighten the hardware to 20 Ib in   2 3 N m      11  Lift the beam assembly slightly and place one end of the spool retaining clip  shown below  into the bronze  bushing in the underside of the beam assembly  At the top of the spool block  gently bend the clip only enough  to insert the free end into the countersink in the end of the spool  Do not permanently deform the clip from the    original shape   e 1 91       020   gt  1    12  Model 760E only  Install the I P Transducer     MG00524a    13  Check positioner calibration  Calibrate as needed  Ensure that there are no air leaks and the spool valve operates  freely     14  Install the cover and tighten screws to 20 Ib  in   2 3 N m      4 6 MODEL 750 ADAPTER PLATE KIT    Use the Model 750 Adapter Plate Kit when a Model 760 Positioner is to replace an installed Model 750 Positioner   The adapter plate has a pair of tapped hole
224. ypes of synthetic compressor lubricants  Some may not be compatible with the materials used in  construction of the instrument  Wetting of these materials by such an oil mist or vapor  etc   may cause them to  deteriorate  This may ultimately result in failure of the positioner     A CAUTION    Synthetic compressor lubricants in the instrument air may cause deterioration of some  positioner components resulting in positioner failure     Positioner Materials of Construction  Stainless Steel  Aluminum  Brass  Nickel Plated Brass  Nickel Plated  Steel  Polyphenylene Sulfide  Silicone  Silicone on Fiberglass  Neoprene on Nylon  Viton    fluoroelastomer  Viton   fluoroelastomer on Nomex    Epoxy Polyester powder coat  Glass Filled Nylon   Polycarbonate  Bronze  Steel    The requirements for a quality instrument air supply can be found in the Instrument Society of America s  Quality  Standard for Instrument Air   ISA S7 3   Basically  this standard calls for the following     e Particle Size   The maximum particle size in the air stream at the instrument should be no larger than 3 microns     e Dew Point   the dew point  at line pressure  should be at least 10   C  18   F  below the minimum temperature to  which any part of the instrument air system is exposed at any season of the year  Under no circumstances  should the dew point  at line pressure  exceed 2   C  35 6   F      Oil Content   The maximum total oil or hydrocarbon content  exclusive of non condensables  should not exce
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
Stomacher® User Instructions  Impregum Penta Soft/DuoSoft Impression Materials  GENERACポータブル発電機 LP5500 PDF版取扱説明書  LOT N°1  TABLEAU DE BORD Circonscription de Montbéliard - Ac  Sennheiser MM 450  User`s Manual - Kikusui Electronics Corp.  - 3D Systems  S.H.Figuarts 人造人間16号 取扱説明書    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file